JP4616801B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and is particularly advantageous for a player such as a big bonus. The present invention relates to a slot machine having a special gaming state.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . Then, a prize is generated according to the display mode derived when the rotation of all the reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles with payout of medals, replay roles that allow the next game to be started without setting the number of bets, and transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player such as regular bonuses and big bonuses. There is a bonus role with. In particular, the bonus combination is not limited to the winning game, and a large profit can be obtained as a whole over a certain period after the winning. Therefore, the player is most interested in the occurrence of the winning combination.

  Further, in this type of slot machine, an internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not the derivation of the winning display result of each role including the bonus role is allowed, and when the winning is won in this internal lottery, the variable display device In addition to controlling the combinations of symbols corresponding to the winning prizes to be matched, and controlling not to match the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning prizes not won in the internal lottery, the winning combination is made according to the matched symbol combinations. What is generated is common.

  As a reel control method in a slot machine, there are mainly a control method and a table method. In the control method, when a stop operation is performed, it is determined whether or not the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is located within the drawing range to the winning line, and if the symbol is within the drawing range, the symbol is drawn into the winning line. If the symbol that does not correspond to the lottery result is located on the winning line, the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped on the winning line. The kick control is performed so as not to occur (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, in the table system, a reel table that defines a symbol to be stopped on the winning line at each stop operation timing is stored in advance, and when the stop operation is performed, a reel table corresponding to the lottery result of the game is stored. With reference to the timing at which the stop operation is performed, the above-described pull-in control and kick-off control are realized by performing control to stop the symbols determined on the reel table on the winning line (for example, Patent Documents) 1).

  On the other hand, in order to increase the above-mentioned expectation for winning the transitional role, a plurality of reel tables for causing display results (so-called chances) that can be expected to win the transitional role appear in the game when the transitional role is not won. The thing which uses continuously over is proposed (for example, refer patent document 2).

  In addition, when a transitional role is missed when a transitional role is elected, or when a specific role to which a gaming value (medal, etc.) is given due to winning a prize when a transitional role is not elected, The display result (so-called chance item) that can be expected to be won is derived, and when the chance item is derived, the transitional role may be elected for a certain period regardless of whether or not the transitional role has been elected. In some cases, the announcement effect indicating the sex is controlled with a high probability, and the expectation of winning the transitional role is enhanced by both the chance eyes and the announcement effect (for example, see Patent Document 3).

  In addition, the regular bonus described above is generally defined as a gaming state that ends when the number of games won and / or the number of games played reaches a predetermined number of games. It is defined as a gaming state in which a regular bonus is repeatedly provided when a predetermined condition such as symbol derivation is established. Here, in the small role game provided between the regular bonus and the regular bonus as a big bonus, there is a game in which the winning probability of the small role is made higher than the normal gaming state (for example, see Patent Document 4).

JP-A-2-283385 JP 2002-810 A JP 2005-168851 A JP-A-6-327809

  However, in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, in the case of using the control method as the control for deriving the display result of the variable display device, the pull-in control and the kicking control are uniquely performed according to the result of the internal lottery. As a result, the display result is monotonous and lacks interest. On the other hand, in the case of using the table method as in the slot machine described in Patent Document 2, by preparing a plurality of reel tables for one lottery result, the lottery result is the same. However, it is possible to derive different display results and diversify the display results, but it is necessary to perform lottery for selecting one table from a plurality of reel tables with respect to one lottery result. There is a problem that the control process becomes complicated because the control process increases.

  In addition, as in the slot machine described in the above-mentioned Patent Document 3, when a chance combination as described above is derived when a specific combination to which a gaming value (medal or the like) is given is lost, for example, the appearance of a chance eye In order to increase the frequency, if the winning probability of the specific combination in the internal lottery is increased, there is a problem that the payout rate in the slot machine becomes too high.

  Further, in the slot machine described in Patent Document 4, the types of small roles that are won in the small role game are basically the same as in the normal gaming state, and even when the internal lottery is won and a prize is won. In some cases, a small role is awarded in which only a small number of medals are paid out compared to other types of small roles. If you win a small role that only pays out a small number of medals even if you win in this way, you will receive more players than if you win a different type of small role where more medals will be paid out. There was a problem that the profits made would be small. In particular, when the number of games won is determined as an ending condition, winning a small role with a small number of medals is a big disadvantage for the player.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the special role without complicating the control and without greatly affecting the payout rate. It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine that can increase the game value and prevent a decrease in game value that a player can acquire in a special game.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A plurality of variables that can be variably displayed by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by driving a stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R). A variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of the display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel)
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game media (medals), and display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas after the game is over,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived (at the start of the game), a special prize that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a prize winning (small role) with the provision of the game medium. Predetermining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of a prize including a special prize (Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2)) accompanying the transition of the gaming state (Big Bonus) When,
Derivation control means (reel stop control by the CPU 41a) for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
A game medium giving means for granting a predetermined number of game media (medals) according to the type of the awarded prize (small role) when the award winning (small role) occurs;
In the special game state (big bonus), a special game (regular bonus) in which the pre-determining means determines with a higher probability than the game in the normal game state that the prize-winning (small role) is allowed to occur. Special game control means (game end processing by the CPU 41a) for controlling for a predetermined period (a period until 12 games are reached or 8 wins),
With
A plurality (three) of game media are required to set a predetermined number of bets as a starting condition for the game,
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has not yet been derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, a derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is provided for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. One display result of a plurality of display results located within a predetermined range from the number of steps with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time of operation (area number assigned for each number of steps for one symbol) Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result (internal winning state) of the prior determination means from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify (stop position) (all at the start of reel rotation) Select the data creation table corresponding to the selected reel, and create stop control tables corresponding to all reels from the selected data creation table. Includes processing),
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area (control for stopping the reel at the stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table) Done
The control pattern selection means includes
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the special winning (big bonus (1) / big bonus (2)) is allowed to occur , a specific variable display area among the plurality of variable display areas A specific display result (chance eye is configured) with respect to at least one of the number of steps (region numbers 6-8, 12, 13 / region numbers 4-7, 12-14) among the number of steps for (left reel) Special winning control pattern (BB (1) RB / BB (2)) that identifies "Replay Watermelon Bell" of No. 2-4 symbols and "Bell Red 7 Bell" of No. 8-10 symbols A special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to
The specific variable display when the pre-determining means has determined to allow the generation of a specific award (1 (1)) in which only one game medium is awarded out of the award winnings. For the region (left reel), the display result that constitutes the specific award is specified for the number of steps (region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) in which the display result that constitutes the specific award is within the predetermined range. And the number of steps (region numbers 4 to 15) different from the number of steps (region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) for specifying the display results (display results including the “blue 7” symbol) constituting the specific award winning. A specific award control pattern for specifying the specific display result with respect to at least one step number (region numbers 4 to 8, 10 to 14) (according to a stop control table corresponding to the item (1) (1)) Reel stop A particular grant winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a control),
When the determination to the effect that does not allow the occurrence of any of the winning by predetermination means have been made (loss), the from any number of steps of said number of steps for the particular variable display area (left reel) A non-winning control pattern selection means for selecting a non-winning control pattern (reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to the item of loss) for specifying a display result other than a specific display result;
The pre-determining means determines that the generation of a special award (cherry) that accompanies more game media than the specific award (1 (1)) out of the award is permitted. The display result (display result including the “cherry” symbol) constituting the special award winning among the number of steps for the specific variable display area (left reel) is located within the predetermined range (four symbols). A special award winning control pattern (a stop control table corresponding to a cherry item) for specifying a display result (a display result including a “cherry” symbol) constituting the special award winning with respect to the number of steps to be performed (region numbers 6 to 12) A special award winning control pattern selection means for selecting a reel stop control)
Including
In the display band (reel 2L) constituting the specific variable display area (left reel), the display result (display result including the “blue 7” symbol) constituting the specific awarded prize (1 sheet (1)) and , And the display results (display results including the “cherry” symbol) constituting the special award winning (cherry) are arranged at intervals exceeding the predetermined range (four symbols),
The special prize-winning control pattern includes only the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result (display result including “Blue 7” symbol) constituting the specific prize-winning is located within the predetermined range (within 4 symbols). The display result (display result including the cherry pattern) that constitutes the special grant prize is specified,
The specific award winning control pattern is for only the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result (display result including the “cherry” symbol) constituting the special award winning is within the predetermined range (within 4 symbols). The display result (display result including the “blue 7” symbol) constituting the specific award winning is specified, and the display result (display result including the “cherry” symbol) constituting the special award winning is within the predetermined range. The specific display result (the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye, the 8th to 10th) with respect to at least one of the number of steps located within (within 4 symbols) Identify the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”)
The special prize control pattern is the number of steps in which the display result (display result including the “cherry” symbol) constituting the special prize winning is within the predetermined range (within four symbols), and the specific prize winning control The specific display result (the “replay watermelon bell” of the second to fourth symbols constituting the chance eye, 8 to 8) with respect to at least one of the number of steps in which the pattern specifies the specific display result The 10th symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”)
It said predetermination means, the when determining the effect that allows the generation of the state that is controlled in the special game specific grant winning (one (1)) may allow the generation of said predetermined imparting prize (JAC) It is also characterized by the fact that it is determined at the same time.
According to this feature, the step of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived in the situation where the display result has not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas. A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the pre-decision means is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number, and the display result is derived to the corresponding variable display area. Control is performed. That is, only one control pattern is applied to the determination result of one pre-determining means, and it is not necessary to select any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns, and the display result of the variable display device is derived. It does not complicate the control when making it.
In addition, when it is determined by the pre-decision means that the occurrence of a special prize is permitted, or the decision is made that the generation of a specific prize is allowed, and the specific prize can not be generated , since it is possible to derive a specific display results that is not derived when even not allowed occurrence of any of the winning by predetermination means, by specific display result is derived, the occurrence of special pay It is possible to increase the player's expectation that this is permitted.
Further, in the state not determined that to allow the generation of special pay, when even not allowed occurrence of any of the winning by predetermination means, i.e. in the state in which the majority of normal, deriving a particular display result It is possible to derive a specific display result by making a decision to allow the generation of the specific award winning by the predetermining means, so that it corresponds to the decision result of the predetermining means. Even when the control pattern is uniquely selected, it is possible to derive a specific display result at an appropriate ratio without being affected by the skill of the player.
In addition, the specific prize winning is a prize that is awarded only one game medium less than the number of game media necessary for setting the maximum bet number that can be set for one game. Even if it is not possible to generate the specific award when the generation of the award is permitted, the player will not suffer a great disadvantage, and the occurrence probability of the specific award will be paid out by the slot machine. since no significant impact on the rate is exerted, for example, it becomes possible to increase the chance that may derive particular display result by increasing the probability that the occurrence of a particular grant winning acceptable, the player on the development of special pay Can effectively raise the sense of expectation.
Further, when the effect that allowed is determined the occurrence of a particular grant winning fewer game media to be applied than the predetermined imparted winning when being controlled in a special game, also that which allows the occurrence of a predetermined imparting winning simultaneously It is determined. The special game, on the basis of this determination, it is possible that can generate at least a predetermined imparting prize. When it is determined that the generation of the predetermined prize is permitted, even if the generation of the specific prize that is less than the game medium to be given is permitted, if the predetermined prize is generated , the player it is possible to obtain a predetermined number of game media, the number of game media to be applied is never becomes fewer than a predetermined number. For this reason, it can prevent that the game media which a player can acquire in a special game decrease.

In addition, in claim 1, to uniquely select a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination unit means that the same control pattern is always selected when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the same. This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the determination results of the prior determination means are different.
Further, in claim 1, the special prize control pattern selection means (specific award prize control pattern selection means) is a special prize control pattern only for one variable display area among the variable display areas for which a display result has not yet been derived. Select a special prize-winning control pattern (specific prize-winning control pattern) for any two or more variable display areas from among those that select (specific prize-winning control pattern) and variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived. Alternatively, a special winning control pattern (specific awarded winning control pattern) may be selected for all variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived. Further, the non-winning control pattern selecting means is a variable display area in which a special winning control pattern (specific awarded winning control pattern) is selected in the special winning control pattern selecting means (specific awarded winning control pattern selecting means). Any non-winning control pattern may be selected.

A slot machine according to claim 2 of the present invention,
A plurality of variables that can be variably displayed by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by driving a stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R). A variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of the display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel)
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game media (medals), and display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas after the game is over,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived (at the start of the game), a special prize that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a prize winning (small role) with the provision of the game medium. Predetermining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of a prize including a special prize (Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2)) accompanying the transition of the gaming state (Big Bonus) When,
Derivation control means (reel stop control by the CPU 41a) for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
A game medium giving means for granting a predetermined number of game media (medals) according to the type of the awarded prize (small role) when the award winning (small role) occurs;
In the special game state (big bonus), a special game (regular bonus) in which the pre-determining means determines with a higher probability than the game in the normal game state that the prize-winning (small role) is allowed to occur. Special game control means (game end processing by the CPU 41a) for controlling for a predetermined period (a period until 12 games are reached or 8 wins),
With
A plurality (three) of game media are required to set a predetermined number of bets as a starting condition for the game,
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. With respect to the variable display area, a predetermined number is determined from the number of steps with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor (area number assigned for each number of steps for one symbol) at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated. The decision result (internal winning state) of the pre-determining means and the variable from which the display result has already been derived from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify one display result among a plurality of display results located within the range Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to a combination of display area display results (stopped positions of stopped reels) Select data creation table corresponding to the other reel when the reel is stopped, includes a process) to create a stop control tables corresponding to the reel in the change from the selected data generation table,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Performing a control for deriving a display result uniquely specified from the number of steps as a display result of the variable display area (a control for stopping the reel at a stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table),
The control pattern selection means includes
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the special winning (big bonus (1) / big bonus (2)) is allowed to occur , a specific variable display area among the plurality of variable display areas A specific display result (chance eye is configured) with respect to at least one of the number of steps (region numbers 6-8, 12, 13 / region numbers 4-7, 12-14) among the number of steps for (left reel) Special winning control pattern (BB (1) RB / BB (2)) that identifies "Replay Watermelon Bell" of No. 2-4 symbols and "Bell Red 7 Bell" of No. 8-10 symbols A special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to
The specific variable display when the pre-determining means has determined to allow the generation of a specific award (1 (1)) in which only one game medium is awarded out of the award winnings. For the region (left reel), the display result that constitutes the specific award is specified for the number of steps (region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) in which the display result that constitutes the specific award is within the predetermined range. And the number of steps (region numbers 4 to 15) different from the number of steps (region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) for specifying the display results (display results including the “blue 7” symbol) constituting the specific award winning. A specific award control pattern for specifying the specific display result with respect to at least one step number (region numbers 4 to 8, 10 to 14) (according to a stop control table corresponding to the item (1) (1)) Reel stop A particular grant winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a control),
When the determination to the effect that does not allow the occurrence of any of the winning by predetermination means have been made (loss), the from any number of steps of said number of steps for the particular variable display area (left reel) A non-winning control pattern selection means for selecting a non-winning control pattern (reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to the item of loss) for specifying a display result other than a specific display result;
The pre-determining means determines that the generation of a special award (cherry) that accompanies more game media than the specific award (1 (1)) out of the award is permitted. The display result (display result including the “cherry” symbol) constituting the special award winning among the number of steps for the specific variable display area (left reel) is located within the predetermined range (four symbols). A special award winning control pattern (a stop control table corresponding to a cherry item) for specifying a display result (a display result including a “cherry” symbol) constituting the special award winning with respect to the number of steps to be performed (region numbers 6 to 12) A special award winning control pattern selection means for selecting a reel stop control)
Including
In the display band (reel 2L) constituting the specific variable display area (left reel), the display result (display result including the “blue 7” symbol) constituting the specific awarded prize (1 sheet (1)) and , And the display results (display results including the “cherry” symbol) constituting the special award winning (cherry) are arranged at intervals exceeding the predetermined range (four symbols),
The special prize-winning control pattern includes only the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result (display result including “Blue 7” symbol) constituting the specific prize-winning is located within the predetermined range (within 4 symbols). The display result (display result including the cherry pattern) that constitutes the special grant prize is specified,
The specific award winning control pattern is for only the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result (display result including the “cherry” symbol) constituting the special award winning is within the predetermined range (within 4 symbols). The display result (display result including the “blue 7” symbol) constituting the specific award winning is specified, and the display result (display result including the “cherry” symbol) constituting the special award winning is within the predetermined range. The specific display result (the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye, the 8th to 10th) with respect to at least one of the number of steps located within (within 4 symbols) Identify the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”)
The special prize control pattern is the number of steps in which the display result (display result including the “cherry” symbol) constituting the special prize winning is within the predetermined range (within four symbols), and the specific prize winning control The specific display result (the “replay watermelon bell” of the second to fourth symbols constituting the chance eye, 8 to 8) with respect to at least one of the number of steps in which the pattern specifies the specific display result The 10th symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”)
It said predetermination means, the when determining the effect that allows the generation of the state that is controlled in the special game specific grant winning (one (1)) may allow the generation of said predetermined imparting prize (JAC) It is also characterized by the fact that it is determined at the same time.
According to this feature, in the situation where the display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and the display result has not yet been derived in the other variable display areas, the display result has not yet been derived. The determination result of the predetermining means from the plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display area where the derivation operation means is operated In addition, a control pattern corresponding to the combination of display results of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, and control for deriving the display result to the corresponding variable display area is performed. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to one display result in the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived as a result of determination by one prior determination means, and any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns Need not be further selected, and the control for deriving the display result of the variable display device is not complicated.
In addition, when it is determined by the pre-decision means that the occurrence of a special prize is permitted, or the decision is made that the generation of a specific prize is allowed, and the specific prize can not be generated , since it is possible to derive a specific display results that is not derived when even not allowed occurrence of any of the winning by predetermination means, by specific display result is derived, the occurrence of special pay It is possible to increase the player's expectation that this is permitted.
Further, in the state not determined that to allow the generation of special pay, when even not allowed occurrence of any of the winning by predetermination means, i.e. in the state in which the majority of normal, deriving a particular display result It is possible to derive a specific display result by making a decision to allow the generation of the specific award winning by the predetermining means, so that it corresponds to the decision result of the predetermining means. Even when the control pattern is uniquely selected, it is possible to derive a specific display result at an appropriate ratio without being affected by the skill of the player.
In addition, the specific prize winning is a prize that is awarded only one game medium less than the number of game media necessary for setting the maximum bet number that can be set for one game. Even if it is not possible to generate the specific award when the generation of the award is permitted, the player will not suffer a great disadvantage, and the occurrence probability of the specific award will be paid out by the slot machine. since no significant impact on the rate is exerted, for example, it becomes possible to increase the chance that may derive particular display result by increasing the probability that the occurrence of a particular grant winning acceptable, the player on the development of special pay Can effectively raise the sense of expectation.
Further, when the effect that allowed is determined the occurrence of a particular grant winning fewer game media to be applied than the predetermined imparted winning when being controlled in a special game, also that which allows the occurrence of a predetermined imparting winning simultaneously It is determined. The special game, on the basis of this determination, it is possible that can generate at least a predetermined imparting prize. When it is determined that the generation of the predetermined prize is permitted, even if the generation of the specific prize that is less than the game medium to be given is permitted, if the predetermined prize is generated , the player it is possible to obtain a predetermined number of game media, the number of game media to be applied is never becomes fewer than a predetermined number. For this reason, it can prevent that the game media which a player can acquire in a special game decrease.

In addition, in claim 2, to uniquely select a control pattern corresponding to the combination of the determination result of the prior determination unit and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is determined by the determination of the prior determination unit When the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is the same, the same control pattern should always be selected. This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the display results of the variable display areas from which the results are derived are different.
Further, in claim 2, the special winning control pattern selecting means (specific awarded winning control pattern selecting means) is configured to display a special winning control pattern only for one variable display area of variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived. Select a special prize-winning control pattern (specific prize-winning control pattern) for any two or more variable display areas from among those that select (specific prize-winning control pattern) and variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived. Alternatively, the special winning control pattern (specific award winning control pattern) may be selected for all of the variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived, and furthermore, the variable display areas for which display results have already been derived. As long as the display results are derived in a specific order, the display results are not yet derived in the variable display area. There are may be configured to select a special winning control pattern (specific grant winning control pattern). Further, the non-winning control pattern selecting means is a variable display area in which a special winning control pattern (specific awarded winning control pattern) is selected in the special winning control pattern selecting means (specific awarded winning control pattern selecting means). Any non-winning control pattern may be selected.

Further, in claims 1 and 2, the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. You may make it become. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
Further, in the first and second aspects, the award winning may be anything as long as a game medium is given as the winning occurs , and the same type of winning award is generated in the base game and the special game. Alternatively, different types of winning prizes may be generated .
Further, in claim 1 or 2, the special game control means that a special game is controlled in a special game state for a predetermined period of time, after a transition to the special game state, a predetermined condition (for example, a transfer prize is generated) The game may be controlled to a special game for a predetermined period when the game is established, or the game is always controlled to a special game in the special game state (for example, after the transition to the special game state, the game is controlled to the special game) The game may be controlled as a special game when the special game state is not finished after the special game is over or when the special game is over.
In addition, in the first and second aspects, the period during which the special game control means controls the special game is such that when the special game is started, a predetermined number of games (one game or a plurality of games may be used). The game may be controlled until a special game is reached, or after the special game has started, a special game end condition (for example, a specified number of times (even once) may be set) It may be good or may be a plurality of times), and the game may be controlled to a special game until the occurrence of a prize is established. Furthermore, even if a special game is reached until a predetermined number of games is reached after a special game starts or a predetermined special game end condition is met, the special game is controlled. good.
Further, in the first and second aspects, preferably, the predetermined prize-winning is such that game media equal to or more than the number of game media to be awarded when any other type of prize-winning occurs is given. The player can obtain the maximum profit by generating a predetermined prize in the special game.
In addition, in claim 1, the specific display result may be a display result different from the display result constituting the special prize, or the same display result as the display result constituting the special prize. There may be.
In addition, the control pattern for uniquely specifying the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated in claims 1 and 2 is the operation of the derivation operation means. Is the control pattern that always specifies the same display result as the derived display result when the number of steps at the same time is the same, for example, the number of individual steps, or a step number unit that is continuous within a certain range (for example, The amount of variation in which the amount of variation until the display result is derived is determined for each identification code (for example, symbol number, etc.) that can identify the step number unit). From the table, the control pattern that uniquely identifies the display result derived for the number of steps when the derivation operation means is operated, the number of individual steps, or The step at the time when the derivation operation means is operated from the priority table in which the priority of the derived display result is determined for each step number unit that is continuous within a certain range or for each identification code that can identify the step number unit. A control pattern that uniquely identifies a display result derived for a number is applicable. In addition, from the number of steps at the time when the derivation operation means is operated, pull-in control is performed so that the display result to be drawn is maximized within a predetermined pull-in range, so that the display result is not derivation prohibited. For those that perform kick-off control that draws display results other than the display results for which derivation is prohibited, if the display result derived from the number of steps at the time when the derivation operation means is operated is uniquely specified, This corresponds to the control pattern of the present invention.

A slot machine according to claim 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The specific award winning control pattern (reel stop control by the stop control table corresponding to the item of 1 (1) / 1 (2)) is determined by the predetermination means by the specific award (1 (1) / The number of steps (area number) for specifying the display result (display result including the “blue 7” symbol) that constitutes the specific winning prize when it is determined that the occurrence of one (2)) is permitted 1-3, 16-21) More specific number of steps than region numbers 4-8, 10-14) The above-mentioned specific display result (replay watermelon bell of 2-4 symbols constituting the chance eye) ”,“ Bell / Red 7 / Bell ”in the 8th to 10th symbols, and“ Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon ”in the 15th to 17th symbols).
According to this feature, when the determination to allow the generation of the specific award winning is made by the pre-determining means, the specific display result is more easily derived than the display result constituting the specific award winning. It is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of a special prize.

A slot machine according to claim 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The special winning control pattern (reel stop control by the stop control table corresponding to the items of BB (1) RB, BB (2))
In the control pattern in which the special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting when a decision to permit the generation of a first special pay of said special pay (big bonus (1)) by the predetermination means are made The display results (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) constituting the first special prize for at least one of the number of steps (area numbers 9-15). A first special winning control pattern (reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to the item of BB (1) RB),
A control pattern selected by the special winning control pattern selecting means when the pre-determining means determines that the second special winning (big bonus (2)) of the special winning is allowed to occur. And the first special prize control pattern has at least one step number (area) different from the number of steps (area numbers 9 to 15) for specifying the display result constituting the first special prize. Display results (display results of area numbers 14 to 16, 15 to 17, 16 to 18, 17 to 19, and 18 to 20) constituting the second special prize for numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) A second special winning control pattern to be identified (reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to the item of BB (2));
Including
The specific winning control pattern (reel stop control by the stop control table corresponding to one (1) item) specifies the display result that the first special winning control pattern constitutes the first special winning pattern. Display that constitutes the specific winning (1 sheet (1)) for at least one step number (region numbers 1 to 3, 16 to 21) out of step numbers (region numbers 9 to 15) Specify the results (display results of area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the operation by the derivation operation means is performed aiming at the display result constituting the first special prize, the display result constituting the specific award winning cannot be derived, and the specific display result is derived. The player's expectation for the occurrence of the special prize will be lost because it will not be possible to determine whether the special award could not be derived or the other second special prize could not be derived. Can be sustained.
The specific award winning control pattern corresponds to at least one step number of the same number of steps as the number of steps in which the second special winning control pattern specifies the display result constituting the second special winning prize. The display result constituting the specific awarded prize may be further specified, or the second special prize control pattern may have a number of steps different from the number of steps specifying the display result constituting the second special prize. You may further specify the display result which comprises the said specific prize-winning with respect to at least 1 step number of them.
In addition, the first special prize and the second special prize may be special prizes for shifting to the same special gaming state, or different types having different advantages, game characteristics, etc. for the player. It may be a special prize that shifts to a special game state.

A slot machine according to claim 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
It said predetermination means performs determination of whether or not to permit the generation of said predetermined imparting winning only in the special game (JAC is subject to internal lottery and winning only in regular bonus),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the predetermined award is only for a special game and not for other gaming states, and the special award can be generated only in a special game. In addition to clearly distinguishing between other game states, it is possible to differentiate between a special game and other game states.

The slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
A data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means (reset / setting switch 36), a ratio (winning probability) determined by the predetermination means (internal lottery) whether or not derivation of a winning display result is allowed is determined. A permissible stage selection means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting one of the permissible stages from a plurality of different permissible stages (setting values);
The permissible step setting means (CPU 41a in the setting change process) sets the data indicating the permissible step selected by the permissible step selection means in the permissible step storage area (set value work) assigned to the storage area of the data storage means. Store the confirmed set value in the set value work)
Storage data determination means (determination of RAM parity and determination of destruction diagnosis data by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not the data stored in the data storage means is normal;
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determining means determines that the data stored in the data storing means is not normal (when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM data is abnormal) RAM error error state)
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the progress of the game is performed on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means. The disabling canceling means for canceling the disabled state and allowing the game to proceed (when the CPU 41a shifts to the RAM abnormal error state, the setting value is newly selected and set by the setting changing process, so that the game Return to processing)
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, the progress of the game is disabled, and an allowable stage (set value) is newly set based on the operation of the setting operation means. If the game is not selected or set, the state where the progress of the game is disabled is not released. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, it is not an allowable stage automatically set by the slot machine, but an allowable stage selected and set based on the operation of the setting operation means (general In addition, since the operation of the setting operation means is operated by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is played based on the permissible stage selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game should be ensured Can do.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1,
A data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means (reset / setting switch 36), a ratio (winning probability) determined by the predetermination means (internal lottery) whether or not derivation of a winning display result is allowed is determined. A permissible stage selection means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting one of the permissible stages from a plurality of different permissible stages (setting values);
The permissible step setting means (CPU 41a in the setting change process) sets the data indicating the permissible step selected by the permissible step selection means in the permissible step storage area (set value work) assigned to the storage area of the data storage means. Store the confirmed set value in the set value work)
Permissible stage data judging means for judging whether or not the data indicating the permissible stage stored in the permissible stage storage area for each game is appropriate data indicating the permissible stage that can be selected by the permissible stage selecting means ( Set value determination processing 1) by the CPU 41a;
Disabling means (error processing by the CPU 41a) for disabling the progress of the game when the allowable stage data determination means determines that the data indicating the allowable stage stored in the allowable stage storage area is not appropriate data. )When,
After the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the disabling of the progress of the game is canceled on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means, and the progress of the game Disabling cancellation means (transition to game processing by the CPU 41a),
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when it is determined for each game whether or not the data indicating the allowable stage that determines the percentage of the derivation of the winning display result is appropriate, and it is determined that the data indicating the allowable stage is not appropriate The game progress is disabled. That is, if the data indicating the allowable level is not appropriate data indicating the allowable level that can be selected by the allowable level selection means, the data indicating the allowable level may be illegally rewritten. Is disabled. The state where the progress of the game is disabled is canceled by newly selecting and setting an allowable stage (setting value) based on the operation of the setting operation means. For this reason, in order to resume the game when there is a possibility that the data indicating the allowable level has been illegally rewritten, the operation of changing the allowable level is more time-consuming than the reset operation for canceling the normal error. Since it is necessary, such fraud can be effectively prevented.
Also, if there is a possibility that the data indicating the allowable stage has been illegally rewritten, the allowable stage selected and set based on the operation of the setting operation means, not the allowable stage automatically set by the slot machine Since the game is played based on (generally, the operation of the setting operation means is operated by an employee of the game shop, which is an allowable stage selected by the game shop side), the game is fair. be able to.
Note that the permissible stage data determination means is configured to store the data at least once at any timing of one game (for example, at the start or end of the game, or at the time of execution of a process that is always executed for each game). What is necessary is just to determine whether or not the data indicating the allowable level stored in the storage means is appropriate data indicating the allowable level that can be selected by the allowable level selecting means.
Further, the permissible stage data determination means determines whether or not the data indicating the permissible stage stored in the data storage means for each game is appropriate data indicating the permissible stage that can be selected by the permissible stage selection means. Although the determination is made, the data is stored when the permissible stage data determination means does not execute every game but a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, every predetermined number of games, a game excluding a special game state advantageous to the player). Whether or not the data indicating the allowable level stored in the means is appropriate data indicating the allowable level selectable by the allowable level selecting means may be determined. The same effect as that of the invention of 2 can be obtained.

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 and 2,
Before the determination by the prior determination means, the numerical data updated within a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing (when the start switch 7 is detected) Numerical data input means (random number acquisition processing by the CPU 41a) for inputting as a random number for lottery) into the determination area;
The winning display result is determined such that a range of determination values that the predetermination means determines to permit derivation of the determination numerical data input to the determination area can be specified. Range specifying data storage means for storing the specified range specifying data (number of determination values) (a storage table for the role-specific table and the number of determination values in the ROM 41b);
With
The range specifying data storage means simultaneously permits the derivation of both the special winning display result (special role) and the normal winning display result (small role, replaying role) other than the special winning display result as the range specifying data. The overlapping range specifying data (the number of determination values for determining the winning of both the small role or the re-playing role and the special role) that can specify the range of the determination value that will be determined to be stored is stored,
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Including a winning allowance determining means for determining whether or not the display result is permitted to be derived, and permitting the derivation of the winning display result determined by the allowance determining means to indicate that the generation is permitted. (If the sum of the random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values overflows, the winning combination or combination of winning combinations is won)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination numerical data input to the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the overlapping range specifying data, the special winning display result and the normal winning display result by the predetermining means It is determined that the derivation of both of the two will be allowed at the same time, so there is an expectation that the derivation of the special winning display result is allowed when the normal winning display result is derived as the game result. I can have it. In addition, since the special winning display result and the normal winning display result can be determined by one allowance determining unit, the processing by the prior determining unit can be simplified.
The range specifying data storage means includes, as the range specifying data, single range specifying data capable of specifying a range of determination values for determining that the derivation of only the special prize display result is permitted, and the special range specifying data. It is also possible to store overlapping range specifying data that can specify the range of the judgment value that will determine that the derivation of both the winning display result and the normal winning display result is allowed at the same time. Thus, even if the normal winning display result is not derived as a result of the game, it cannot be denied that the special winning display result is permitted to be derived. The player's expectation for what is being done can be sustained.
In addition, the range specifying data storage means, as the range specifying data, single range specifying data that can specify the range of the determination value that determines to permit the derivation of only the normal winning display result, and the special range specifying data It is also possible to store overlapping range specifying data that can specify the range of the judgment value that will determine that the derivation of both the winning display result and the normal winning display result is allowed at the same time. Thus, even if the normal winning display result is derived as a result of the game, it cannot be denied that the special winning display result is allowed to be derived. Therefore, even in such a situation, the special winning display result is permitted to be derived. Can maintain the player's expectation of being

The slot machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 and 2,
Before the determination by the prior determination means, the numerical data updated within a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing (when the start switch 7 is detected) Numerical data input means (random number acquisition processing by the CPU 41a) for inputting as a random number for lottery) into the determination area;
With respect to the special prize display result (special role), it is possible to specify a range of determination values that will be determined by the pre-determining means to permit derivation to the determination numerical data input to the determination area. Special winning range specifying data storage means for storing range specifying data (special role judgment value number) determined to be (special role-specific table in ROM 41b and storage area of special role judgment value number); ,
Determining that the pre-determining means permits the derivation of the numerical value data for determination input in the determination area for the normal winning display results (small role, re-game player) other than the special winning display result Normal winning range specifying data storage means (small combination and replay in ROM 41b) for storing range specifying data (number of determination values of small combination and replaying combination) determined so that the range of determination values can be specified A role-specific table, a small role, a storage area for the number of judgment values of re-playing roles), and
With
The range of determination values that will determine that the predetermination means permits the derivation of the special prize display result is determined so that the predetermination means permits the derivation of the normal prize display result. Including a range of judgment values that overlaps with the range of judgment values (a range of judgment values in which a small role or a re-playing role and a special role are won and won)
The pre-determining means includes
Depending on whether or not the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the normal winning range specifying data storage means includes the determination numerical data input to the determination area, A normal winning allowance judging means (lottery process for judging the winning of the small role and the re-gamer) for judging whether or not to permit the derivation;
Whether or not the same range of determination value data as used by the normal winning allowance determining unit is included in the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the special winning range specifying data storage unit A special winning allowance determining means for determining whether or not the derivation of the special winning display result is permitted (a lottery process for determining the winning of a special role);
Including
The pre-determining means is
A determination is made as to whether or not derivation of a winning display result is permitted by both the normal winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means;
Permitting derivation of both the normal winning display result and the special winning display result when it is determined that both the normal winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the winning display result is allowed to be derived. (If the winning process is determined by both the lottery process for determining the winning of the small part and the re-playing part and the lottery process for determining the winning of the special part, Both gamers and special roles are elected)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination numerical data input to the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the overlapping range specifying data, the special winning display result and the normal winning display result by the predetermining means It is determined that the derivation of both of the two will be allowed at the same time, so there is an expectation that the derivation of the special winning display result is allowed when the normal winning display result is derived as the game result. I can have it.
It should be noted that the range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to permit the derivation of the special prize display result is determined to determine that the pre-determining means permits the derivation of the normal prize display result. Including a range of determination values that does not overlap with a range of determination values to be performed, and when the pre-determining means determines that only the special winning allowance determining means indicates that derivation of the winning display result is permitted Is determined to permit the derivation of only the special prize display result, and it is determined that both the normal prize acceptance determination means and the special prize permission determination means indicate that the derivation of the prize display result is permitted. It may be determined that the derivation of both the normal winning display result and the special winning display result is allowed. In this way, even if the normal winning display result is not derived as a result of the game, Since it is not denied that the derivation of the special pay display results are acceptable, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for what is allowed is the derivation of the special pay display results in such a situation.
In addition, the range of the determination value that determines that the prior determination unit allows the derivation of the normal winning display result is determined so that the preliminary determination unit allows the special winning display result to be derived. Including a range of determination values that does not overlap with a range of determination values to be determined, and when the pre-determining means determines that only the normal winning allowance determining means indicates that the winning display result is allowed to be derived Is determined to permit the derivation of only the normal winning display result, and it is determined that both the normal winning permission determination unit and the special winning permission determination unit indicate that the derivation of the winning display result is permitted. Further, it may be determined that the derivation of both the normal winning display result and the special winning display result is permitted. In this way, even if the normal winning display result is derived as a game result, the special winning display result may be determined. Since it is not denied that the derivation of the winning display result is allowed, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for what is allowed is the derivation of the special pay display results in such a situation.

  In the means 3 and 4, the range specifying data determined so that the range of the determination value can be specified may be the data itself indicating the range of the determination value, or the determination value of each winning display result. And the total number of determination values may be stored, and the range of determination values may be specified from the total number of determination values and the determination value of each winning display result. Also, the determination value other than the winning display result determined last and the total number of determination values are stored, and the remaining determination value range excluding the determination value other than the winning display result determined last from the total determination value is stored. It may be specified as a range of determination values for the winning display result determined last.

The slot machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 to 4,
Special game determination means for determining whether or not the special game is controlled in the special game state (determining whether or not the big bonus is in progress and the regular bonus is activated),
The special game determination means determines whether or not the special game is controlled by the special game for each game in the special gaming state (determines whether or not the regular bonus is operating in the big bonus for each game. ),
The special game control means starts control of the special game when the special game determination means determines that the special game is not controlled (when the regular bonus is not activated during the big bonus). , Start regular bonus),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, while being controlled to the special gaming state, it is determined whether or not the game is controlled by the special game for each game. If not controlled by the special game, the control of the special game is started. The game value can be increased fastest in the special gaming state, so that the player's interest in the transition to the special gaming state can be enhanced rather than the control of the special game being started with some winning as in the past. Can be increased.
Further, since it is determined whether or not each game is controlled by a special game, the control program for each game in the special game state can be shared, so that the program capacity can be reduced.
The special game control means may start control of the special game simultaneously with the start of the special game state. In this case, while the special game state is being controlled, the special game is controlled. Therefore, the control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.
The special game determination means determines whether or not the special game is controlled at the end of each game, recognizes the game from which the special prize display result is derived as a special game state, and In the game from which the winning display result is derived, it may be determined whether or not the game is controlled by the special game. Even in such a case, the game can be changed to the special game while being controlled to the special game state. Therefore, the control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.
Further, the special game determination means does not recognize the game from which the special prize display result is derived as a special game state, and determines whether or not the special game is controlled at the start of each game. Even in such a case, it is only necessary to control the special game while it is controlled to the special game state. Therefore, the control accompanying the transition to the special game state can be simplified.

The slot machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 to 4,
The special game control means resumes the control of the special game when the predetermined period expires after the control of the special game starts and the control of the special game ends (a regular bonus in a big bonus) If the big bonus continues at the end, resume the regular bonus)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control of the special game is finished while the special game state is controlled, the special game is resumed, so that the gaming value can be increased fastest in the special game state. Therefore, the interest of the player associated with the transition to the special game state can be enhanced rather than the control of the special game being started with some winning as in the prior art.
Further, since the process for re-activating the special game is performed only when the control of the special game is finished, unnecessary processing is not performed in a state where the control of the special game is not finished.
The special game control means may start control of the special game simultaneously with the start of the special game state. In this case, while the special game state is being controlled, the special game is controlled. Therefore, the control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.

The slot machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 to 6,
Abnormal winning determination data that can specify whether or not derivation of the winning display result is allowed in the game for each bit assigned to each type of winning display result based on the determination result of the prior determination means Abnormal winning determination data setting means for setting (an abnormal winning determination flag in which the value of the bit allocated to the permitted combination is 0 and the value of the bit allocated to the unacceptable combination is 1) ( Conversion to an abnormal winning determination flag by inverting all bits of the winning flag),
After display results are derived for all of the variable display areas, it is possible to specify whether or not the winning display results are derived for each bit assigned for each type of winning display result based on the derived display results Winning result data setting means (all winning reels) for setting winning result data (a winning symbol flag in which the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is 1 and the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is 0) Processing to create a winning symbol flag from the stopped symbol after the stop of)
Calculation means for calculating the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means (Logical AND operation of abnormal winning determination flag and winning symbol flag),
Abnormal winning determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the value of each bit calculated by the calculating means (determines whether the result of the logical product operation is 0 or not, that is, other than 0) Processing for determining an abnormal prize when there is at least one value of)
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned is calculated in the abnormal winning determination data and the winning result data, and the result is determined. It is possible to determine whether or not it is an abnormal winning, and it is not necessary to specify the bit of the winning flag of the winning prize that has been established as in the past and check the value of the specified bit. It is also possible to simplify the process when determining whether or not the prize is abnormal.

The slot machine according to means 8 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 to 7,
A game value storage means (a credit counter assigned to the RAM 41c) for storing a game value (credit) owned by the player;
A bet number setting means for setting a bet number using at least the game value stored in the game value storage means (the CPU 41a subtracts the credit counter by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6) And setting control of the number of bets to which the BET counter is added)
Return control means (the CPU 41a is used for the return switch 19 to return the game value stored in the game value storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined game value return operation section (the checkout switch 10). The payment control for paying out the credit counter medals by detection)
When the award winning display result is derived, the value giving processing means (CPU 41a performs a value giving process for assigning a predetermined number of game values according to the kind of the award winning display result. Add the number of medals according to the type of small role to the credit counter, and pay out the medals that exceed the upper limit of the credit counter)
Special game state transition means for shifting to the special game state (big bonus) when the special winning display result is derived in the normal game (normal game state) (the CPU 41a performs control for shifting to the big bonus when winning the big bonus. Do)
A bet number setting prohibiting unit (the CPU 41a sets prohibition of inserting medals by setting at the start of the game and prohibits setting of a bet number by the bet number setting unit when the game starts. , Disable detection of the MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibiting means for prohibiting return control by the gaming value return means when the game is started (the CPU 41a invalidates the detection of the settlement switch 10 by the setting at the start of the game);
After a display result is derived for all of the variable display areas, when a result other than the award winning display result is derived, it is determined that the game is over when the display results are derived for all of the variable display areas, When the award winning display result is derived, game end determining means for determining the end of the game when the value giving process accompanying the derivation of the award winning display result is completed (the CPU 41a determines whether the game has ended, the medal is paid out) In a game in which no winning is accompanied, the end of the game is determined when all reels are stopped. In a game in which a winning with a medal is paid out, when the medal payout (addition of credits) is finished. Determine the end of the game)
On the condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game, bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the betting number setting prohibiting means (cancellation of prohibition of medal insertion by the CPU 41a, 1 Sheet BET switch 5, detection of MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibition release means (validation of detection of the settlement switch 10 by the CPU 41a) for canceling prohibition of return control by the return control prohibition means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
In the game from which the special prize display result has been derived, the special prize display is performed during a period from when the game end determination means determines the end of the game until a predetermined time (the production waiting time for the BB prize effect) elapses. Special winning effect execution means for executing a special winning effect indicating that the result has been derived (effective when BB winning) (the CPU 91a executes the BB winning effect when winning a big bonus);
With
The betting number setting prohibition canceling means has passed a predetermined time (the BB winning effect production waiting time) after the game end determination means determines the end of the game in the game from which the special winning display result is derived. Sometimes the bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibiting means (the CPU 41a cancels the medal insertion prohibition at the beginning of the BET process of the next game, Enable detection of switch 5 and MAXBET switch 6),
The return control prohibition canceling means cancels the prohibition of return control by the return control prohibiting means when the game end determination means determines the end of the game in the game from which the special winning display result is derived. Including a time return control prohibition canceling means (the CPU 41a enables the detection of the settlement switch 10 before the BB winning effect production waiting process),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the game for which the special winning display result is derived, the return control prohibition is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and setting of the bet number is prohibited until a predetermined time has elapsed after the game ends. The game value stored in the game value storage means can be returned even during the period in which the game is performed, that is, the period in which a special winning effect such as a fanfare is being performed. Reflecting the will of the player, the game value stored as owned by the player can be returned. Thereby, for example, in the game in which the special prize display result is derived, a part of the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means before starting the game in the special gaming state accompanying the derivation of the special prize display result May be exchanged for prizes (for example, soft drinks, cigarettes, etc.), but it is possible to receive a return of gaming value reflecting such a player's will.
Note that the special winning bet number setting prohibition canceling means, when there are a plurality of types of special winning display results, a game in which a specific type of special winning display result is derived from the plural types of special winning display results. Only when the predetermined time has elapsed after the game end determining means determines the end of the game, the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibiting means is canceled and a special prize display other than the specific type is displayed. In the game from which the result is derived, when the game end determination unit determines the end of the game, the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibition unit can be canceled.

The slot machine according to means 9 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 to 8,
A game value storage means (a credit counter assigned to the RAM 41c) for storing a game value (credit) owned by the player;
A bet number setting means for setting a bet number using at least the game value stored in the game value storage means (the CPU 41a subtracts the credit counter by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6) And setting control of the number of bets to which the BET counter is added)
Return control means (the CPU 41a is used for the return switch 19 to return the game value stored in the game value storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined game value return operation section (the checkout switch 10). The payment control for paying out the credit counter medals by detection)
When the award winning display result is derived, the value giving processing means (CPU 41a performs a value giving process for assigning a predetermined number of game values according to the kind of the award winning display result. Add the number of medals according to the type of small role to the credit counter, and pay out the medals that exceed the upper limit of the credit counter)
Special game state transition means for shifting to the special game state (big bonus) when the special winning display result is derived in the normal game (normal game state) (the CPU 41a performs control for shifting to the big bonus when winning the big bonus. Do)
Special game state end condition determination for determining whether a predetermined special game state end condition (the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds 465) in the special game state (big bonus) is satisfied Means (the CPU 41a determines whether or not the total number of payouts exceeds 465 for each game in the big bonus);
When the special game state end condition determining means determines that the end condition is satisfied, the special game state end means for terminating the special game state (the CPU 41a determines that the total number of paid-out medals in the big bonus is 465. Control to end the big bonus when it exceeds)
A bet number setting prohibiting unit (the CPU 41a sets prohibition of inserting medals by setting at the start of the game and prohibits setting of a bet number by the bet number setting unit when the game starts. , Disable detection of the MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibiting means for prohibiting return control by the gaming value return means when the game is started (the CPU 41a invalidates the detection of the settlement switch 10 by the setting at the start of the game);
After a display result is derived for all of the variable display areas, when a result other than the award winning display result is derived, it is determined that the game is over when the display results are derived for all of the variable display areas, When the award winning display result is derived, game end determining means for determining the end of the game when the value giving process accompanying the derivation of the award winning display result is completed (the CPU 41a determines whether the game has ended, the medal is paid out) In a game in which no winning is accompanied, the end of the game is determined when all reels are stopped. In a game in which a winning with a medal is paid out, when the medal payout (addition of credits) is finished. Determine the end of the game)
On the condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game, bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the betting number setting prohibiting means (cancellation of prohibition of medal insertion by the CPU 41a, 1 Sheet BET switch 5, detection of MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibition release means (validation of detection of the settlement switch 10 by the CPU 41a) for canceling prohibition of return control by the return control prohibition means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
In a game in which the end condition is determined to be satisfied by the special game state end condition determining unit, a predetermined time (end waiting time for the ending effect) is determined after the game end determining unit determines the end of the game. End effect execution means for executing an end effect (ending effect) indicating that the special gaming state has ended during the period until the elapsed (CPU 91 executes the ending effect at the end of the big bonus);
With
The bet number setting prohibition canceling means is a predetermined time after the game end determining means determines the end of the game in the game in which the end condition is determined to be satisfied by the special gaming state end condition determining means. Ending bet number setting prohibition canceling means (the CPU 41a cancels the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibiting means when the ending effect effect waiting time has elapsed). And the detection of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 are enabled)
The return control prohibition canceling means is the return control prohibition means when the game end determination means determines the end of the game in the game in which the end condition is determined to be satisfied by the special gaming state end condition determination means. An end-time return control prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition of the return control by (the CPU 41a activates the detection of the settlement switch 10 before the waiting process for the ending effect),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the game in which the end condition in the special gaming state is satisfied, the return control prohibition is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and the number of bets until a predetermined time elapses after the game ends. Since it is possible to return the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means even during the period in which the setting is prohibited, that is, the period in which the ending effect such as the ending effect is being performed, Reflecting the player's will as much as possible, the game value stored as owned by the player can be returned. Thereby, in particular, it is possible to receive the return of the game value reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the special game state.
The end-time bet number setting prohibition canceling means, when there are a plurality of special game states, only in a game in which a specific type of special game state end condition is satisfied among the plurality of types of special game states. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the game end determination means determined the end of the game, the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibition means is canceled and a special game state other than the specific type is released. In a game in which the end condition is satisfied, the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibiting unit can be canceled when the game end determination unit determines the end of the game.

The slot machine according to means 10 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5 and means 1 to 9,
A game value storage means (a credit counter assigned to the RAM 41c) for storing a game value (credit) owned by the player;
A bet number setting means for setting a bet number using at least the game value stored in the game value storage means (the CPU 41a subtracts the credit counter by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6) And setting control of the number of bets to which the BET counter is added)
Return control means (the CPU 41a is used for the return switch 19 to return the game value stored in the game value storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined game value return operation section (the checkout switch 10). The payment control for paying out the credit counter medals by detection)
When the award winning display result is derived, the value giving processing means (CPU 41a performs a value giving process for assigning a predetermined number of game values according to the kind of the award winning display result. Add the number of medals according to the type of small role to the credit counter, and pay out the medals that exceed the upper limit of the credit counter)
Special game state transition means for shifting to the special game state (big bonus) when the special winning display result is derived in the normal game (normal game state) (the CPU 41a performs control for shifting to the big bonus when winning the big bonus. Do)
Special game state end condition determination for determining whether a predetermined special game state end condition (the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds 465) in the special game state (big bonus) is satisfied Means (the CPU 41a determines whether or not the total number of payouts exceeds 465 for each game in the big bonus);
When the special game state end condition determining means determines that the end condition is satisfied, the special game state end means for terminating the special game state (the CPU 41a determines that the total number of paid-out medals in the big bonus is 465. Control to end the big bonus when it exceeds)
A bet number setting prohibiting unit (the CPU 41a sets prohibition of inserting medals by setting at the start of the game and prohibits setting of a bet number by the bet number setting unit when the game starts. , Disable detection of the MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibiting means for prohibiting return control by the gaming value return means when the game is started (the CPU 41a invalidates the detection of the settlement switch 10 by the setting at the start of the game);
After a display result is derived for all of the variable display areas, when a result other than the award winning display result is derived, it is determined that the game is over when the display results are derived for all of the variable display areas, When the award winning display result is derived, game end determining means for determining the end of the game when the value giving process accompanying the derivation of the award winning display result is completed (the CPU 41a determines whether the game has ended, the medal is paid out) In a game in which no winning is accompanied, the end of the game is determined when all reels are stopped. In a game in which a winning with a medal is paid out, when the medal payout (addition of credits) is finished. Determine the end of the game)
On the condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game, bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the betting number setting prohibiting means (cancellation of prohibition of medal insertion by the CPU 41a, 1 Sheet BET switch 5, detection of MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibition release means (validation of detection of the settlement switch 10 by the CPU 41a) for canceling prohibition of return control by the return control prohibition means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
With
The bet number setting prohibition canceling means is a predetermined release operation (in a game in which the end condition is determined to be satisfied by the special gaming state end condition determining means after the game end determining means determines the end of the game). The betting number setting prohibiting means for stopping when the betting number setting prohibiting means by the betting number setting prohibiting means is canceled when the reset operation is performed (the CPU 41a controls the betting state after the end of the big bonus to stop When the reset operation is detected in the state, the process shifts to the next game, and at the beginning of the BET process of the next game, the inability to insert medals is canceled and the detection of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is enabled). Including
The return control prohibition canceling means is the return control prohibition means when the game end determination means determines the end of the game in the game in which the end condition is determined to be satisfied by the special gaming state end condition determination means. Including a return control prohibition canceling means for canceling return control prohibition by the CPU 41a (the CPU 41a enables detection of the settlement switch 10 before controlling the stop state),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the game in which the end condition in the special gaming state is satisfied, the prohibition of the return control is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and a predetermined release operation such as a reset operation by a store clerk is performed after the game ends. It is possible to return the game value stored in the game value storage means without waiting for the release operation even during a period in which the setting of the bet number is prohibited until it is made (so-called stop state) Therefore, it is possible to receive a return of the game value stored as belonging to the player, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. Thereby, in particular, it is possible to receive the return of the game value reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the special game state.
It should be noted that, when there is a plurality of special game states, the betting number setting prohibition canceling means at the time of stopping is only in a game in which a termination condition for a specific type of special game state among these multiple types of special game states is satisfied. After the game end determination means determines the end of the game, the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibition means is canceled when a predetermined release operation (reset operation) is performed, In a game in which a special game state end condition is satisfied, the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibiting unit can be canceled when the game end determination unit determines the end of the game.

Note that in the means 8 to 10, the bet number setting prohibition means is configured such that, for example, even when a game medium used for setting the bet number is inserted, the game medium is returned or stored in the game value storage means. The setting of the bet number may be prohibited by invalidating the operation of the bet number setting operation means operated when the game value used is used for setting the bet number.
Further, in the means 8 to 10, the return control prohibiting means may prohibit the return control by invalidating the operation of the game value return operating means, for example.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open and a side end of the housing. It consists of a pivoted front door.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have “red 7 (black 7 in the figure)”, “blue 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “bell” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. 1 bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the bet number of the game, and using a credit, a predetermined number of bet numbers determined according to the game state within the range (in this embodiment, the normal game state and The MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting 3 for RT (replay time) and 1 for the regular bonus described later, the medal stored as credits, and the medals used for setting the number of bets are settled (credits) And the settlement switch 10 operated when the game is started). 7, the reel 2L, 2C, stop switch 8L is operated to stop each rotation of the 2R, 8C, 8R are provided.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BET LED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BET LED 15 that notifies that the bet number is 2 is lit, and that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 16 to notify, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, the start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, and the weight (previous game) (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay notifying that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 3).

  Further, inside the front door, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, changing a set value described later And a set value indicator 24 for displaying the set value at that time during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, is provided in a hopper tank (not shown). ) Side or medal payout outlet 9 side, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching, and a medal insertion sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side are provided. ing.

  Inside the casing, a reel unit (not shown) comprising the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R, and the reel sensor 33 capable of detecting the respective reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. A hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, a hopper motor 34 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening 9, and paying out by driving the hopper motor 34. A payout sensor 35 for detecting a medal and a power supply box (not shown) are provided.

  On the front of the power supply box is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later 36, automatic selection for enabling / disabling the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement at the end of the big bonus, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) It functions as a settlement switch 29, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for releasing an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. Reset / setting that functions as a setting switch to change the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of the internal lottery Switch 38, the power switch 39 is provided which is operated to ON / OFF the power.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, as the specified number of bets, three are determined in the normal gaming state and RT described later, and one is determined in the regular bonus described later. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) is placed on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. The Rukoto. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 100. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The power supply board 100 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 100 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. Further, the above-described hopper motor 34, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply substrate 100.

  Connected to the game control board 40 are the one-BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, and the reel sensor 33 described above. In addition, the above-described payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply substrate 100, and detection of these connected switches is detected. A signal is input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 100. The hopper motor 34 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 for controlling the game, random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment) are used. A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 100 , A motor driving circuit 45 that controls the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid driving circuit 46 that controls the driving of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a driving control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power supply voltage supplied to the LED drive circuit 47 and the slot machine 1 to be monitored is monitored. A power failure detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a drop is detected. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the CPU 41a is not input, a reset signal is sent to the CPU 41a. A reset circuit 49 to be applied and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a is provided with a plurality of registers (storage areas) for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, A and F registers (flag registers) that mainly store calculation data, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers that store general-purpose data, and data indicating the position of the program being executed PC register to be stored, SP register to store a stack pointer (an address indicating the current position of a stack area to be described later), an R register to store data indicating a memory block of the RAM 41c performing a refresh operation to be described later, and the RAM 41c There are provided IX and IY registers for storing data indicating a reference position when referring to a storage area, and an I register for storing data indicating the position of an interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via the signal input terminal DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4 can be executed. For each interrupt, a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA) is provided. Can be selected and set in either an interrupt mode for generating an external interrupt in accordance with the timer mode or an interrupt mode for generating an internal interrupt in accordance with the number of clock inputs to the CPU 41a.

  In the present embodiment, among the interrupts 1 to 4, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupt 3 is set to the timer mode, and interrupts 1 and 4 are unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Execute interrupt processing. Further, the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment), and performs a timer interruption process (main) described later. Execute. Moreover, although the interrupts 1 and 4 are set to unused, the interrupts 1 and 4 may generate | occur | produce by noise etc. For this reason, when interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  The CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 1 to 4, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, interrupts to be executed with priority in the order of interrupts 2, 3, 1, 4 are set. In other words, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 3 and interrupt 1 or 4 occur simultaneously, interrupt 3 is prioritized. To run.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 1 to 4. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with the above-described R (refresh) register for performing this refresh operation. The R register consists of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b, and the value is updated every execution time of one instruction. .

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  Further, the CPU 41a acquires the state of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 at the time of start-up, and sets the stop function valid / invalid and the automatic checkout function valid / invalid in a specific register of the CPU 41a. It has become. The state of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 is acquired only at the time of activation, and the stop / automatic checkout function is enabled / disabled based on the acquired state. Even if the switch 29 is operated, the validity / invalidity of the stoppage and automatic settlement function is not newly set.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main), and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and a reel LED 55 disposed on the front door of the slot machine 1 are connected to the rendering control board 90. The components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A liquid crystal driving circuit 92 that controls the driving of the connected liquid crystal display 51, a lamp driving circuit 93 that controls the driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when it is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 91a, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40. In addition to performing various controls for production, mounted on production control board 90 Directly or indirectly controls each unit of the control circuit.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. An interrupt terminal (not shown) of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command among command transmission lines. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. The CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the CPU 41a, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT), the CPU 91a interrupts the process even when an interrupt process based on another interrupt is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the top, and even if another interrupt occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when the operation is further performed from the setting 6, the setting is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, a power interruption interrupt process is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing, the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, that is, other than 0 In addition to storing specific data, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or for destructive diagnosis If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  Further, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the bet number set in the game in the internal lottery process described later is a bet number corresponding to the gaming state. And even when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set and controlled to the RAM abnormal error state, so that the progress of the game is disabled. It is like that. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  Further, the CPU 41a executes a set value determination process for determining whether or not a set value used for the internal lottery in the internal lottery process described later is an appropriate value.

  In the set value determination process, the set value determination process 1 for determining whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is within an appropriate range (1 to 6), the set value used for the internal lottery, and the setting set when the setting is changed Setting value determination processing 2 for determining whether or not the values match, whether the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the setting value used for the internal lottery of the previous game match The set value determination process 3 to be determined is executed for each game.

  In the setting value determination process 1, when the setting value used for the internal lottery is not a value in the proper range, or in the setting value determination process 2, the setting value used for the internal lottery, the setting value set when the setting is changed, If the set values do not match or the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game does not match the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game in the set value determination process 3, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. The RAM abnormal error code is set and controlled to the RAM abnormal error state to disable the progress of the game. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus, a normal gaming state, and an RT (replay time) as a gaming state. Among these, 1 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus. 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the gaming state and RT. For this reason, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when the betting number is set to 1, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT, the betting number is set to 3. And the game can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is If it is 1, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number is 3 according to the gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. All winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  FIG. 4 shows a winning combination table. The winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41, and the combination numbers (1 to 17) assigned in the order in which the lottery is performed corresponding to combinations of combinations and combinations to be selected in the internal drawing. ) Is registered.

  As the role in this slot machine 1, the special bonus is a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a regular bonus, a small role is cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), bell, JAC, Replay is defined as a re-playing role. In addition, combinations of combinations in the slot machine 1 include big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (1) +1 (1), big bonus (2) +1 (1), Big bonus (1) +1 (2), big bonus (2) +1 (2), JAC + Cherry, JAC + 1 (1), JAC + 1 (2) are defined. That is, the total number of combinations of combinations and combinations is 17.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that are subject to lottery differ depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT, or regular bonus. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT, whether or not any special role is being carried over (whether or not it is already set in the winning flag of the special role that any special role has been won) ) Also depends on the combination and combination of combinations that are subject to lottery. In this embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a role to be a lottery object is determined according to this state number. It becomes possible to specify. Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when no special combination is carried over at RT, the state number is set. When “1” is set and any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “2” is set as the state number, and when any special combination is carried over at RT “3” is set as the state number, and “4” is set as the state number in the case of a regular bonus.

  As shown in FIG. 4, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT and no special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0” or “1”, the big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1 ), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), Bell, that is, the roles of role numbers 1-14 The combination of the combination and the combination becomes the target of the internal lottery. When the game state is the normal game state or RT and any special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “2” or “3”, replay, cherry, 1 The sheet (1), the sheet (2), the bell, that is, the combination of the combination of the combination numbers 10 to 14 is the target of the internal lottery. Also, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, when the state number is set to “4”, a bell, JAC + cherry, JAC + 1 sheet (1), JAC + 1 sheet (2), that is, a combination and combination of the combination number 14 or later. The combination is subject to internal lottery.

  Cherry is awarded when the symbol “cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and two medals are paid out. If the “Cherry” symbol stops at the upper or lower level of the left reel, the combination of cherries will be aligned on the two winning lines L2 and L4 or the winning lines L3 and L5. Since winning a cherry on the winning line, four medals will be paid out. One (1) is awarded when a combination of “blue 7-red 7-watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. One (2) is awarded when a combination of “Red 7-Blue 7-Watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. The bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. JAC is awarded only when a combination of “bell-bell-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the regular bonus, and one medal is paid out. In a game state other than the regular bonus, even if a combination of “bell-bell-replay” is arranged on any winning line, no winning is achieved.

  Replay is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is aligned on either the winning line in the normal gaming state or RT, but with regular bonuses, even if this combination is aligned, no replay is awarded. When a replay is won, the medals will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets no longer required to be set in the next game (the regular bonus will not be replayed and will always be 3) This is substantially the same as when three corresponding medals are paid out.

  The regular bonus is awarded when the combination of “red 7-red 7-BAR” is aligned on either of the winning lines in the normal gaming state or RT. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state or RT to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The big bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” or a combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state or RT. . When the big bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. When transitioning to the big bonus, the transition to the regular bonus is performed at the same time as the transition to the big bonus. Controlled by regular bonus. That is, during the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus exceeds 465. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the game state is the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When it is necessary to distinguish between the big bonus by “red 7-red 7-red 7” and the big bonus by “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2 ). Further, the regular bonus, the big bonus (1), and the big bonus (2) described above may be simply referred to as “bonus”.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the combination of the display results of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel becomes a combination that constitutes a chance chance described later in the normal gaming state, the special role (other special roles are carried over). (If not) and the small lottery probability is the same as in the normal gaming state, but shifts to a replay time (RT) where the winning probability of replay is high. While the gaming state is at RT, the RT flag is set in the RAM 41c. Then, the RT is terminated by reaching the prescribed game number (two games in the present embodiment) without winning any bonus or by winning any bonus before reaching the prescribed game number.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, as will be described later, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, according to the obtained random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and setting value Done. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for the combination of general combination and special combination is won. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are drawn exclusively.

  Each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the game state is referred to in the order of combination numbers registered in the winning combination table shown in FIG.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT and no special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0” or “1”, the winning combination table is referred to, Numbers 1 to 14 and combinations of roles, that is, big bonus (1) [number 1], big bonus (2) [number 2], regular bonus [number 3], big bonus (1) + cherry [ Role number 4], big bonus (2) + cherry [port number 5], big bonus (1) +1 (1) [port number 6], big bonus (2) +1 (1) [port number 7], Big Bonus (1) +1 (2) [Role 8], Big Bonus (2) +1 (2) [Role 9], Replay [Role 10], Cherry [Role 11], 1 (1 ) [Position number 12], 1 sheet 2) [winning numbers 13, Bell [winning number 14 are sequentially read as a target combination of the internal lottery.

  When the game state is the normal game state or RT and any special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “2” or “3”, the winning combination table is referred to. And the combination of the combination of the combination numbers 10 to 14, that is, replay [the combination number 10], cherry [the combination number 11], one sheet (1) [the combination number 12], one sheet (2) [the combination number 13] , [Bell number 14] are sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  Further, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “4” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to and combinations of the combinations of the combination numbers 14 to 17, that is, the bell [port number 14] , JAC + cherry [role number 15], JAC + 1 sheet (1) [role number 16], JAC + 1 sheet (2) [role number 17] are sequentially read out as target lotteries for internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, when the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles and the state number indicating the current gaming state are added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows In addition, it is determined that the combination or combination of combinations is won.

  Then, when winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, the winning flag corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be selected is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c. Set. The internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is general. It is assigned as a general role storage work in which the winning flag of the role is set. Specifically, when any of the roles (special roles) of the role numbers 1 to 3 is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, and the general role is stored. Clear the winning flag set for the workpiece. In addition, when any of the role numbers 4 to 9 (special role + general role) is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, A winning combination flag indicating that the general combination has been won is set in the general combination storing work. If any of the combination numbers 10 to 14 (general combination) is won, a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. In addition, when a combination of any of the combination numbers 15 to 17 (JAC (general combination) + general combination) is won, the general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is stored in the general combination respectively. Set to work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  The number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations is read according to the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the role-specific table stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41.

  FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the role-specific table. The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes. The number of determination values is registered in correspondence with the above-described state number that can specify the gaming state. This is because even if the combination is the same combination or combination, the winning probabilities may differ depending on the gaming state. The number of determination values may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  In the role-specific table, as shown in FIG. 5, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2) The storage addresses of the number of determination values of bell, JAC + cherry, JAC + 1 (1), and JAC + 1 (2) are registered.

  Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 ( 1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2) are roles that will be subject to internal lottery when no special roles are carried over in the normal gaming state or RT The storage addresses of the number of determination values corresponding to the state numbers 0 and 1 are registered. For the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus, the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the determination value number is individually registered according to the set value. Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big For bonus (2) +1 (2), the common flag is 1, and the storage address of the common number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Replay is a role that is subject to internal lottery regardless of whether or not a special role is carried over in the normal gaming state or RT, and the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to state numbers 0 and 2 (normal gaming state) , Storage addresses for the number of determination values corresponding to state numbers 1 and 3 (RT) are registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Cherry, 1 (1), 2 (2) are roles that are subject to internal lottery in the normal gaming state or RT, and state numbers 0 and 1 (the special role is not carried over in the normal gaming state or RT) And the storage address of the determination value corresponding to the state numbers 2 and 3 (the normal gaming state or the state where the special role is carried over in the RT) are respectively registered. Yes. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  The bell is a role that is subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the state numbers 0 to 3 (game state other than the regular bonus), and the state number 4 (regular bonus) And the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to each are registered. The common flag for this combination is 0, and the storage addresses for the number of determination values are individually registered according to the set value.

  JAC + Cherry, JAC + 1 (1), JAC + 1 (2) are roles that are subject to internal lottery only in the regular bonus, and the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to the state number 4 (regular bonus) is registered. Yes. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Also, the number of medals to be paid out when winning each winning combination is registered in the role-specific table. However, only the cherry, which is a small role, 1 (1), 1 (2), bell, and JAC, is the target for paying out medals when winning a prize. In addition, when “cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage of the left reel, the combination of cherries is aligned on the two pay lines as described above, so the total number of payouts is paid out. It will be. In this embodiment, the number of cherries paid out is 2, so that 4 medals are paid out.

  The big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus winning are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and are not eligible for paying out medals. The replay does not involve the payout of medals, but it is substantially the same as the payout of 3 medals since it is not necessary to insert medals used for setting the bet amount in the next game (always the normal gaming state).

  FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on the addresses registered in the role-specific table. The storage area for the number of determination values is provided in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 in the development model, and in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the main control unit 41 in the mass production model.

  For example, in the address ADD, in the gaming state with the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal gaming state or the state in which no special combination is carried over in the RT, the target combination of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and the set value is This is an address that is referenced when the value is 1, and at this time, 15 that is the value stored here is acquired as the number of determination values. Addresses ADD + 2, ADD + 4, ADD + 6, ADD + 8, and ADD + 10 are addresses that are referenced when the internal lottery target is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 2 to 6 in the gaming state of state numbers 0 and 1, respectively. It is. Addresses ADD + 12, ADD + 14, ADD + 16, ADD + 18, ADD + 20, and ADD + 22 are referred to in the game state with state numbers 0 and 1 when the target part of the internal lottery is the big bonus (2) and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively. Address. Addresses ADD + 24, ADD + 26, ADD + 28, ADD + 30, ADD + 32, and ADD + 34 are addresses that are referred to when the target character of the internal lottery is a regular bonus and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively, in the gaming state of state numbers 0 and 1. is there.

  The big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) in the game states of the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, the normal game state or the state where no special combination is carried over in the RT, are individually determined according to the set values. Since the number of values is stored and different numbers of determination values are stored, the winning probabilities of these combinations and combinations of combinations differ depending on the set values.

  On the other hand, for the regular bonuses in the gaming states of these state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal gaming state or in the state where no special combination is carried over in RT, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value. However, since the same number of determination values is stored, the regular bonus winning probability is the same for any set value.

  Further, when the address ADD + 36 is the game state of the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal game state or the state where no special combination is carried over in the RT, the target combination of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) + cherry The address ADD + 38 is the target of the internal lottery in the gaming state of the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal gaming state or the state where no special role is carried over in the RT. This address is referred to regardless of the set value when the winning combination is a big bonus (2) + cherry, and the address ADD + 40 is any special combination in the gaming state of state numbers 0 and 1, that is, the normal gaming state or RT. Is not carried over, and the target for internal lottery is Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1) The address ADD + 42 is referred to regardless of the fixed value, and the address ADD + 42 is used for the internal lottery in the game state of the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal game state or the state where no special combination is carried over in the RT. This address is referred to regardless of the set value when it is a big bonus (2) +1 (1), and the address ADD + 44 is a special game state with state numbers 0 and 1, that is, any special game state or RT. In a state where no combination is carried over, when the target combination of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) +1 piece (2), it is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value, and the address ADD + 46 is the state number 0, In one gaming state, that is, a normal gaming state or a gaming state in which no special role is carried over in RT, an internal lottery Elephants combination is an address to be referred to regardless of the setting value when a big bonus (2) +1 sheets (2).

  The address ADD + 48 is an address that is referenced regardless of the set value when the state number is 0 or 2, that is, in the normal gaming state, when the internal lottery target role is replay. The address ADD + 50 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 1 or 3, that is, in RT, when the target combination of the internal lottery is replay.

  The address ADD + 52 is referred to regardless of the set value when the target number of the internal lottery is cherry in the state numbers 0 and 1, that is, in the normal gaming state or the state in which no special combination is carried over in RT. Address. The address ADD + 54 is referenced regardless of the set value when the state number is 2 or 3, that is, in the normal gaming state or in the state where any special combination is carried over in RT, and the target combination of the internal lottery is cherry Address.

  The address ADD + 56 is related to the set value when the state number is 0 or 1, that is, in the normal gaming state or in the state where no special combination is carried over in RT, the number of target combination for internal lottery is one (1). This address is referred to without The address ADD + 58 is set to the set value when the state number is 2 or 3, that is, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state or RT, and the number of target combination for internal lottery is one (1). Regardless of the address that is referenced.

  The address ADD + 60 is related to the set value when the state number is 0 or 1, that is, in the normal gaming state or in the state where no special combination is carried over in RT, and the number of target combination for internal lottery is one (2). This address is referred to without The address ADD + 62 is set to the set value when the state number is 2 or 3, that is, in the normal gaming state or the state where any special combination is carried over in the RT, and the number of target combination for internal lottery is one (2). Regardless of the address that is referenced.

  Addresses ADD + 64, ADD + 66, ADD + 68, ADD + 70, ADD + 72, and ADD + 74 are in the state numbers 0 to 3, that is, in the normal gaming state or RT, when the target role of the internal lottery is the bell and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively. The address to be referenced. Addresses ADD + 76, ADD + 78, ADD + 80, ADD + 82, ADD + 84, and ADD + 86 are addresses that are referred to when the target character of the internal lottery is the bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of state number 4, that is, the regular bonus. It is. Regarding the bell in the gaming state of state number 4, the number of determination values is stored individually according to the set value, but the number of determination values of setting values 1 and 2, the number of determination values of 3 and 4, 5 and 6 Since the common determination value number is stored in each of the determination value numbers, the winning probabilities of the setting values 1 and 2 are the same, the winning probabilities of the 3 and 4 are common.

  The address ADD + 88 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 4, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target part of the internal lottery is JAC + Cherry. The address ADD + 90 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 4, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target character of the internal lottery is JAC + 1 (1). The address ADD + 92 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 4, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target part of the internal lottery is JAC + 1 (2).

  FIGS. 7A and 7B and FIGS. 8A to 8C are diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations, and winning. is there. In FIG. 7 (a), when no special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, in FIG. 7 (b), when no special role is carried over in RT, the normal game is shown in FIG. 8 (a). An example when any special combination is carried over in the state, when any special combination is carried over in RT in FIG. 8B, and in the regular bonus in FIG. 8C Each is shown. FIGS. 7A and 7B and FIGS. 8A to 8C show examples where the set value is 6. FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 7A, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and Bell are subject to internal lottery, and in the set value 6, the number of determination values for each combination is 20, 20, 31, 10 10, 5, 5, 5, 5, 2245, 76, 153, 153, 2082. First, the big bonus (1) subject to the internal lottery is determined by adding the judgment value number of 20 and the result of addition overflows when 16364 to 16383 are acquired as random numbers for the internal lottery. Become.

  Next, the big bonus (2) that is the subject of the internal lottery is obtained by adding 40, which is the sum of the judgment value number 20 of the big bonus (1) and the judgment value number 20 of the big bonus (2). The winning combination is obtained when 16344 to 16363, which will overflow, are obtained as random numbers for internal lottery. Similarly, the regular bonus is a big bonus when 16313 to 16343 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the big bonus (1) + cherry is a big bonus when 16303 to 1631 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. (2) + Cherry is obtained when 16293-16302 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1) is acquired when 16288-16292 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery , Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), 16283 to 16287 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), random numbers for internal lottery are 16278 to 16282 As a big bonus (2) + 1 (2), 16273-16277 are random numbers for internal lottery The replay is acquired when 14028-16272 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the cherry is 1 (1) when 13952-14027 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. ) When 13799 to 13951 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, 1 (2) is when 11646 to 13798 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, When it is acquired as a random number for lottery, it is determined that each is a win. When 0 to 11563 are obtained as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  The approximate winning probability of each combination and combination of combinations calculated based on the number of judgment values is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus ( 2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Replay , Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), Bell, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 528.5, 1/1638, 1/1638, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1 / 7.3, 1 / 215.6, 1 / 107.1, 1 / 107.1, and 1 / 7.87.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (b), when no special combination is carried over in RT, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a regular bonus, a big bonus (1) + cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2) ), Replay, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and Bell are subject to internal lottery. In the set value 6, the number of determination values for each combination is 20, 20, 31, 10, 10 5, 5, 5, 5, 12245, 76, 153, 153, 2082, so 16364-16383, 16344-16363, 16313-16343, 16303-1631, 1 When 293-16302, 16288-16292, 16283-16287, 16278-16282, 16273-16277, 4028-16272, 3952-4027, 3799-3951, 3646-3798, 1564-3645 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery Each is determined to be a winner. Also, the approximate winning probabilities for each role are 1 / 819.2, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 528.5, 1/1638, 1/1638, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1 / 1.34, 1 / 215.6, 1 / 107.1, 1 / 107.1, 1 / 7.87. When 0 to 1563 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8A, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, only replay, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell are inside. Since the number of determination values for each combination is 2245, 96, 163, 163, 2082 at the set value 6, it is 14139-16383, 14043-14138, 13880-14042, 13717-13879, 11635. When ˜13716 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, each is determined to be a winner. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities for each combination are 1 / 7.3, 1 / 170.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 7.87. When 0-11634 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8B, when any special role is carried over in RT, only the replay, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and the bell are internal lottery. Since the number of determination values of each combination is 12245, 96, 163, 163, 2082 at the setting value 6, 4139-16383, 4043-4138, 3880-4042, 3717-3879, 1635-3716 Is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, each is determined to be a win. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 1.34, 1 / 170.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 7.87. When 0 to 1634 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8C, in the regular bonus, bell, JAC + cherry, JAC + 1 sheet (1), JAC + 1 sheet (2) are targeted for internal lottery. Since the numbers of determination values are 15919, 96, 163, and 163, when 465 to 16383, 369 to 464, 206 to 368, and 43 to 205 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, they are determined to be winning. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective combinations are 1 / 1.03, 1/17: 00, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 100.5. When 0 to 42 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the table index contains table creation data from the reference address (table_index) for referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state). The difference up to the address where the index data indicating the head address of the stored area is stored is registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address (table_index).

  Specifically, Loss, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), Bell, Replay, Big Bonus (1) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + Bell, Big Bonus (1) + Replay, Big Bonus (2) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Bell, Big Bonus (2) + Replay, Regular Bonus (+ Loss), Regular Bonus + Cherry, Regular Bonus + 1 (1), Regular Bonus + 1 (2), Regular Bonus + Bell, Regular Bonus + Replay, JAC + Cherry, JAC + Like (1), for each of the JAC + 1 sheets (2), the index data indicating the leading address of the area table created for data is stored it is stored. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, if the same control is applied (for example, big bonus (1) + replay winning, big bonus (2) + replay winning, regular bonus + replay winning In the case of applying the same control, etc., the same address is stored as index data. In such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data. Will be.

  The table creation data is composed of drawn frame number data indicating the number of drawn frames corresponding to the stop operation position, and the address of the drawn frame number data to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The data for the number of frames drawn in depending on the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, or left Depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and in the situation where any one of the reels is stopped, Since it may differ depending on the stop position of the stopped reel, the address of the number of frames to be drawn to be referred to is registered for each rotating reel for each situation, and based on the top address of the table creation data , It is possible to specify the address of the number of frames data to be referred to according to each situation, and it is necessary according to each situation from this identified address. It has to be able to identify the lead-frame number data. Even if the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, the same address is registered as the address of the drawn frame number data when the same drawn frame number data is applied. In such a case, the same data for the number of frames to be drawn is referred to.

  The drawn frame number data is data that can specify the number of drawn frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, as shown in FIG. 10, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined with respect to one reel. Area numbers 1 to 21 from the position are assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. The number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule in the number of drawn frames data so that the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the number of drawn frames data. It has become.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed at the timing (the timing at which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number) positioned in the fluoroscopic window 3 lower symbol area). It is a table in which the number of frames to be drawn when detected is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. Acquires the address of the data for the number of drawn frames corresponding to each reel corresponding to the rotating state of the reel, and develops the data for the number of drawn frames for each reel stored at the acquired address to create a stop control table for all the reels. .

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stopped reel and the number of pull-in frame data of the unstopped reel corresponding to the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained. The number-of-drawing frame number data stored in each reel is expanded to create a stop control table for unstopped reels.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding reel will be described. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, an area (stop point in the figure) corresponding to the area number corresponding to the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area (stop operation point in the figure) corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. It stops at the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area of the fluoroscopic window 3).

  Further, in the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area for the number of drawn frame data corresponding to the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and number-of-drawing frame number data corresponding to the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined, The stop control table created with reference to these is also unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of up to 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  Also, in the table index, the number of frames to be drawn in to the address corresponding to the case where one of the winning combinations is won, with the winning combination being drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames, so that the winning combination is not aligned For creating a table with the number of frames to be drawn in, so that the index data for identifying the table creation data for which is defined is stored, and the address corresponding to the case where the winning is lost is not included in any role Stores index data for specifying data. Therefore, if any winning combination is won, there will be a stop control table in which the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and the number of drawing frames to be drawn is set so that the winning combination is not aligned. The reel stop control is performed, and if no winning combination is selected, a stop control table is created in which the number of frames to be drawn that does not have any winning combination is determined, and the reel stop control is performed. Done. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed to align and stop this, The symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  Also, in the table index, the address corresponding to the case where a small role is elected with a special role carried over from before the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Bell, etc.) The number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the selected special role can be drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and the stoppage position where the selected special role cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames is selected. The index data for specifying the data for creating the table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the number of frames is drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames is stored, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if it is possible to align and stop the symbols of the special roles that have been elected within the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, the control is performed to align and stop them. If you can't draw a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, align the symbols of the small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, control is performed to stop them together, and the symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn.

  Also, in the table index, when a re-playing role is won in a state where the special role has been carried over from before the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Replay etc.), the re-playing role has 4 frames. Index data for specifying data for creating a table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible within a range is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. As will be described later, “replay” which is a symbol constituting the re-gamer is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range, so if the special player is carried over from before the previous game, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Regardless of the operation timing, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  In the table index, when JAC + other small roles are elected (JAC + Cherry, JAC + 1 (1), JAC + 1 (2)), the address corresponding to JAC ("bell-bell-replay" combination) The index data for specifying the data for creating the table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the number of frames is drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames is stored, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the JAC symbols are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. As will be described later, “bell” which is a symbol constituting the JAC in the left and middle reels and “replay” which is a symbol constituting the JAC in the right reel are 5 in each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. It is arranged within the design, that is, within 4 frames, and can be stopped at any position within the drawing range of 4 frames, so if JAC + other small roles are elected, a stop switch by the player Regardless of the operation timings of 8L, 8C, and 8R, JACs will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the JAC on the winning line is prioritized over the cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and the JAC always wins.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames, for all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It can be stopped at any position within the range. That is, when the winning flag for the bell and the replay is set, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player.

  In addition, when the replay winning flag is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “Replay” symbol must be used as a stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. When a stop control table for drawing on L2 or L5 is created, and the “replay” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L2 or L5 of the middle reel or the right reel, the stop control table for the left reel is 5 The “replay” symbol of the number, that is, when the symbol is stopped on the winning line L2 or L5, the “replay” symbol excluding the “replay” symbol that also stops the “cherry” on the winning line L1. A stop control table is created to draw on the winning line L2 or L5, and the middle reel and right reel are moved from the left reel. When stopped first, the “replay” symbol is drawn on the winning line L2 or L5, and when the left reel is stopped thereafter, the “replay” symbol other than No. 5 is always placed on the winning line L2 or L5. Therefore, for example, when the “replay” symbol of No. 5 stops on the winning line L2 or L5 of the middle reel and the right reel, the replay and the cherry are not won simultaneously. In the left reel, the 2nd “Replay” design and the 7th “Replay” design are arranged within 4 frames, so even if control is performed to avoid the 5th “Replay” design, Regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, the replay can always be won. If the left reel stop operation is performed when the replay winning flag is set and all reels are still rotating, except for the case where the replay and cherry win at the same time, A stop control table for drawing the “replay” symbol into any of the pay lines L1 to L5 within the drawing range of 4 frames is created. That is, when the left reel is first stopped, control is performed so that the combination of “replay” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5.

  In addition, when the winning flag for the bell is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “Bell” symbol must be used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. A stop control table is drawn in on L1, and when the “bell” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L1 of the middle reel or the right reel, the “bell” symbol is used as the stop control table for the left reel. A stop control table for drawing on the winning line L1 in the drawing range of 4 frames is created, and when the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “bell” symbol is drawn on the winning line L1, Thereafter, when the left reel is stopped, the “bell” symbol is always drawn on the winning line L1. In the left reel, the “bell” symbol and the “cherry” symbol are not arranged continuously. For this reason, the bell can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, and the bell and the cherry are not simultaneously won. If the left reel stop operation is performed when the bell winning flag is set and all reels are still rotating, the bell and cherry will win at the same time, A stop control table for drawing the “bell” symbol into any of the pay lines L1 to L5 within the drawing range of 4 frames is created. That is, when the left reel is stopped for the first time, control is performed so that the combination of “bells” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5.

  Next, chance eyes and reach eyes will be described. The chance in the present embodiment is a display mode that can be derived when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, or when one (1) or one (2) is won. Furthermore, as described above, it is also a display mode that shifts to RT by being derived in the normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the display result of the left reel is “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols or “Bell Red 7 Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols, "Blue 7 Watermelon" is stopped, and all the roles are not aligned on the winning line. As a result of displaying the middle reel, "Cherry Replay Cherry", No. 11, No. 13, No. 21, No. 1, The symbol “Cherry Bell Cherry” stops, and the display mode in which all the roles are not aligned on the winning line, and the display result of the right reel, “Replay Cherry Blue 7” of the symbols 10-12 are stopped. However, a display mode in which none of the combinations are arranged on the winning line is applied as an opportunity.

  The reach eye is a display mode that can be derived only when any bonus (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus) is won in the normal gaming state. As a result of the display on the left reel, the display mode in which “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16-18 is stopped is the reach of all bonuses, and symbols 20, 20, 1, 1 or 12-14 The display mode in which the symbol “Replay Watermelon Bell” has stopped and none of the roles are on the winning line is applied as the reach of the big bonus (1) or regular bonus.

  Further, in this embodiment, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state, or when one (1), one (2) is won, each reel 2L, 2C, 2R Regardless of the order in which the stop operations are performed, it is controlled so that chances can be derived, and when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is performed. Regardless of the order in which they are performed, the reach is controlled so that it can be derived, provided that each reel is stopped in an order that satisfies a specific condition (eg, left, middle, right). You may be able to derive the chance eyes and reach eyes.

  Here, an example of reel stop control when the chance eyes and reach eyes are derived will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 10 shows a case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), and one piece (1) is won without any bonus carried over (1 piece (1)). If none of the bonuses have been carried over and 1 (2) has been won (1 (2)), if no bonus has been carried over and the cherry has been won (Cherry), If the Big Bonus (1) or Regular Bonus is won and no other character is selected (BB (1) RB), the Big Bonus (2) is selected and no other character is selected It is a figure which shows the stop control table of the left reel produced in the case (BB (2)).

  First, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), a stop control table corresponding to the item of losing in FIG. 10 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. In this stop control table, “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 for all area numbers, “bell / red 7 bell” of symbols 8 to 10 and “ "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon", 12-14 design "Replay Watermelon Bell", 16-18 design "Blue 7 Watermelon Blue 7", 20, 21, 1 design "Replay The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than “watermelon bell” is specified is determined, and 2 to 4 are display results that constitute a chance eye when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any timing. In the display results that comprise the "Replay Watermelon Bell" of the number 8 symbol, the "Bell Red 7 Bell" of the 8th to 10th symbol, and the "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon" of the 15th to 17th symbol There is a 12-14 pattern "Replay Watermelon Bell" No. 6-18 symbols “Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7”, 20, 21, No. 1 symbol “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” will not be derived as a display result and will eventually be a chance or reach Does not hold.

  In the normal gaming state, when one bonus (1) is won in a state where no bonus is carried over (one (1)), as one stop control table for the left reel (1 (1)) The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is created. In this stop control table, the display result is specified in which “blue 7” constituting one (1) combination stops on any pay line for the region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21. The number of drawn frames is determined. Particularly, for the area numbers 18 and 19, the number of drawn frames for specifying “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. In addition, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 4 to 8, and “Bell Red 7 Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 is specified for the region numbers 10 to 14. The number of drawn-in frames is determined, and the number of drawn-in frames in which display results other than the display result including the display mode that constitutes the chance and reach eyes for other area numbers are specified.

  Therefore, the timings of the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21, that is, the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected at a possible timing, a display result in which the “blue 7” symbols constituting one (1) combination stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timings of the area numbers 18 and 19 among the timings at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 15th to 17th symbols “Replay Blue 7 Watermelon” are derived, and if one (1) combination is not completed on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timings of the region numbers 4 to 8 among the timings at which the “blue 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result, and a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 10 to 14, “bell bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is detected. “Red 7 Bell” is derived as a display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one (1) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of frames to be drawn to identify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of drawn-in frames for which the display result of “Blue 7” stopping on any pay line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the sheet (1) has been won, a higher rate than the display result in which “blue 7” constituting the combination of the sheet (1) stops on any winning line is derived, Chance eyes Among the displayed results, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th symbols derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing when one (1) cannot be won. "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" will be derived.

  When one (2) is won in the state where no bonus has been carried over in the normal gaming state (1 (2)), as the left reel stop control table, one (2) in FIG. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is created. In the stop control table, for the area numbers 9 to 15, the number of drawn frames for specifying the display result that “red 7” constituting the combination of two (2) stops on any pay line is specified. In particular, for the area numbers 12 and 13, the number of frames to be drawn in which “Bell, Red 7 and Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are specified is determined. In addition, “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 6 to 8, and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the symbols 15 to 17 is specified for the region numbers 17 to 21. The number of drawn-in frames is determined, and the number of drawn-in frames in which display results other than the display result including the display mode that constitutes the chance and reach eyes for other area numbers are specified.

  Therefore, the timing of the area numbers 9 to 15, that is, the timing at which the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any of the winning lines. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected, a display result is derived in which the “red 7” symbols constituting one (2) combination stop on any winning line. In particular, when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 12 and 13 among the timings at which the “red 7” symbol can be drawn in a range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 8th to 10th symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” are derived, and if one (2) combination is not completed on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timings of the area numbers 6 to 8 among the timings at which the “red 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When the “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result and the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 17 to 21, “replay “Blue 7 / Watermelon” is derived as the display result. In these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, the chance chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which “Red 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of frames to be drawn to identify “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of drawn-in frames for which the display result of “Red 7” stopping on any pay line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the sheet (2) is won, a higher rate than the display result that “red 7” constituting the combination of the sheet (2) stops on any winning line is derived, Chan Among the display results constituting the eyes, “Replay Watermelon Bell” and 15 to 17 of symbols 2 to 4 derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won. The symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” will be derived.

  When the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, BB (1) RB (1) of FIG. 10 is used as a stop control table for the left reel. A stop control table corresponding to the item is created. In the stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols is specified for the area numbers 6 to 8 is determined. Number of drawing frames in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the design symbol is specified is determined, and for the area number 17, 20, 21, the number of drawing frames in which “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the design is specified The number of frames to be drawn that specifies the “replay watermelon bell” of the 12th to 14th symbols for the area number 16 is determined, and the “replay / blue” of the 15th to 17th symbols for the area number 17 is determined. “7. Watermelon” is specified, and the number of drawn frames is specified for area numbers 18 and 19, and “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” is specified for symbols 16-18. For other area numbers. Number pull frames are determined eye display result other than the display results and a display mode which constitutes a is specified.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and finally on the winning line Since there are no winning combinations, chances will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 12 and 13, the symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as the display result, and finally the big on the winning line If the combination of bonus (1) is not complete, no other combination will be lined up on the winning line, so a chance will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and the winning combination is finally placed on the winning line. Since there is no match, chances will be established.

  When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 16, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 12 to 14 is derived as the display result, and the timing of the left reel is determined at the timing of the area number 1. When a stop operation is detected, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 20, 21, No. 1 is derived as a display result, and in any case, no winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Therefore, the reach that can appear only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus (1) is won is established, and when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 18, The 16th to 18th symbols “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” are derived as the display result, and the reach that is common to all bonuses is established.

  When the big bonus (2) is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, the stop control corresponding to the item of BB (2) in FIG. A table is created. In this stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4 is specified for the area numbers 4-7 is determined, and 8-10 for the area numbers 12-14. The number of drawn frames in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the design symbol is specified is determined, and the number of drawn symbols in which “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the symbols 15 to 17 is identified for the area number 17 The number of frames to be drawn in which “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” of the symbols 16 to 18 is specified for the region numbers 19 to 21 is determined. The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than the display result including the display mode constituting the eye is specified is determined.

  Therefore, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timing of the region numbers 4 to 7, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and the region numbers 12 to 14 are displayed. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of, the symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of Nos. 8 to 10 are derived as the display result, and the winning combination is finally aligned on the winning line. Since there is no chance, a chance is established. If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and finally a big is displayed on the winning line. If the combination of bonus (2) is not complete, no other combination will be aligned on the winning line, and the chance will be established. In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 19 to 21, “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16 to 18 is derived as a display result and is common to all bonuses. The reach will be established.

  As described above, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4, No. of No. 8-10 A stop control table that can specify “bell / red 7 / bell”, “replay / blue 7 / watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (1) cannot be awarded among the display results constituting the chance eye In addition, it is possible to specify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols as the display result, and constitute one (1) combination “ Stop control table that can identify “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be stopped on the winning line. Is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (2) cannot be awarded among the display results constituting the chance eye In addition, it is possible to specify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as display results, and constitute a combination of one sheet (2). Stop control table that can identify "bell, red 7, bell" of the 8th to 10th symbols as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the "red 7" symbol can be stopped on the winning line Is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  As a result, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, or when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, or in the normal gaming state In this case, when only one winning combination (2) is won, reel stop control is performed based on a stop control table from which chances can be derived. In particular, when only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, when the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) cannot be stopped on the winning line, 2-4 It is possible to derive “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the symbols and “Bell, Red 7 and Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 as the display result, and “Blue 7” constituting a combination of one (1). When the symbol can be stopped on the winning line, it becomes possible to derive “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of No. 15 to 17 as the display result, and only one (2) in the normal gaming state. When winning, if the “Red 7” symbols that make up the combination of two (2) cannot be stopped on the winning line, the “Replay Watermelon Bell”, 15-4 symbols, The 17th pattern When “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” can be derived as a display result, and the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2) can be stopped on the winning line, the 8th to 10th The symbol “bell / red 7 / bell” can be derived as a display result.

  In addition, in the normal game state, when any of the roles is not won, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “bell / red 7 • bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols constituting the chance eye A stop control table that can specify display results other than “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. Thus, when any combination is not won in the normal gaming state, the reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table that does not derive a chance.

  Also, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and in the normal gaming state In the case where only one (2) is elected, “Replay Watermelon” of symbols 2 to 4 constituting the chance eye when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12, 13・ "Bell" or 8-10 symbols "Bell, Red 7, Bell" are derived as display results, but if no role is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the area number 6, Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2 to 4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8 to 10 are displayed as display results. Derived Rukoto is not. That is, when the bonus or one (1), one (2) is won, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived by performing the left reel stop operation at the above timing. On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the left reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  At the start of reel rotation, the above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a stop control table for the left reel, and any one of the middle reel and the right reel is stopped. Even if both the middle reel and the right reel are stopped, if the symbols that make up the winning combination are on the winning line, or if a non-winning character wins The above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a left reel stop control table, except for a case where there is a possibility that the left winning will occur. In other words, when the left reel is stopped first, or when it is stopped second or third, the combination of symbols that make up the winning bonus is on the winning line of the already stopped reel Or, if there is a possibility that an unwinned role may win from the display result of reels that have already been stopped, 1 (1) or 1 (2) will be won in the normal gaming state, If any bonus is won, reel stop control will be performed based on the stop control table from which chance chances can be derived. If no part is won, chances will not be derived. The reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table.

  In addition, for the middle reel and the right reel, stop control that can derive a chance when one (1) or one (2) is won in the normal gaming state or when any bonus is won. Stop control is performed based on the table.

  Although not specifically shown, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel is Creates a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn that specifies the display result that constitutes the chance eye, as a stop control table for the middle reel, regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel in the still rotating state In the state where at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel, the chance reel is configured as the stop control table for the right reel. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result to be specified is specified is created.

  In addition, when only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. When the “Blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of (1) are not stopped, the stop control in which the number of drawing frames for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye is determined as the stop control table for the middle reel. The table is created, and at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the "Blue 7" symbol that constitutes one (1) combination on the winning line of the left reel stops If not, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “red 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination on the winning line of the middle reel If not stopped, the stop control table of the right reel, stop control table number pull frame is defined to display results constituting the chances eyes is identified is created.

  In addition, when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one is on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. When the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) is stopped, one sheet is placed on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel, as a stop control table for the middle reel. A winning line in which the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel and the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel for the area where the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. Stop control in which the number of drawn frames for which the display result to be stopped is specified is determined and the number of drawn frames for which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified for a part of the other area is determined Table is created and left reel When the “Blue 7” symbol constituting one (1) combination on the winning line is not stopped, the number of drawn frames in which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified as the middle reel stop control table Is generated.

  In addition, when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped, and one is on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. When the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of (2) are not stopped, the stop control in which the number of drawing frames for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye is defined as the stop control table for the middle reel The table is created, and at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes one (2) combination on the left reel winning line stops If not, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes one (2) combination on the winning line of the middle reel If not stopped, the stop control table of the right reel, stop control table number pull frame is defined to display results constituting the chances eyes is identified is created.

  In addition, when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped, and one is on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. When the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) is stopped, one sheet is placed on the winning line where the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel, as a stop control table for the middle reel. A winning line in which the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel and the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped in the area where the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. Stop control in which the number of drawn frames for which the display result to be stopped is specified is determined and the number of drawn frames for which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified for a part of the other area is determined Table is created and left reel When the “red 7” symbol constituting one (2) combination on the winning line is not stopped, the number of drawn frames in which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified as the middle reel stop control table Is generated.

  On the other hand, if none of the winning combinations is won in the normal gaming state, the display constituting the chance eye is used as the stop control table for the middle reel or the right reel regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. A stop control table in which the number of drawn frames other than the result is determined is created.

  Specifically, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the state, in the stop control table for the middle reel created regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels, the “cherry replay cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers is displayed. 11, 21, 1, 2, “Cherry Bell Cherry” is specified, and when a middle reel stop operation is detected at the timing of these area numbers, 11-13 One of the symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 21, 1, 2 “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as the display result. So it will not be aligned with the winning combination on to the winning line, so that the chance eyes is established.

  In the normal gaming state, when any of the bonuses is won and no other combination is won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. In the stop control table for the right reel created regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel, the “replay / cherry / blue 7” of the 10th to 12th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers is displayed. When the number of drawn frames to be specified is determined and a stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” of symbols 10 to 12 is derived as a display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one reel (1) is on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel created when the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of) is not stopped, the “cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers・ When the number of frames to be drawn that identifies “Replay Cherry”, 21st, 1st, 2nd “Cherry Bell Cherry” is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers One of the 11th to 13th symbols "Cherry Replay Cherry", 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols "Cherry Bell Cherry" is derived as a display result, and finally the winning la Since the winning combination will not be aligned on emissions, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one reel (1) is on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created when the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of) is stopped, there is one on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel. One area on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel against the area number where the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. When the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result indicating that the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) stops is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, the left reel The “Blue 7” symbol has stopped On the prize line, one (1) "red 7" combination constitute the symbol is displayed to stop result is derived. In addition, at least one of the region numbers different from the region number for specifying the display result of the stop of the “red 7” symbol on the winning line where the “blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel is set. On the other hand, the number of frames to be drawn that specifies “Cherry Replay Cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols, “Cherry Bell Cherry” of the 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols is determined. When a reel stop operation is detected, any one of 11 to 13 symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry” and 21 and 1 and 2 symbols “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as a display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  In other words, when only one (1) is elected, at least one left (1) is on the winning line of the left reel while at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the case where the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination is stopped, the area number for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye and the area number for identifying the display result constituting one (1) combination are obtained. A different stop control table is created.

  When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. ) Is not stopped, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, one on the winning line of the middle reel ( In the stop control table for the right reel created when the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of 1) are not stopped, the “10” to “12” symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers are displayed. When the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is specified is determined and a stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, Blue 7 "is derived as a result display, since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel (2) is already on the winning line of the left reel with the left reel already stopped and the middle reel still rotating. In the middle reel stop control table created when the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of) are not stopped, the “cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers・ When the number of frames to be drawn that identifies “Replay Cherry”, 21st, 1st, 2nd “Cherry Bell Cherry” is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers One of the 11th to 13th symbols "Cherry Replay Cherry", 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols "Cherry Bell Cherry" is derived as a display result, and finally the winning la Since the winning combination will not be aligned on emissions, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and at least one left (2) on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created when the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination is stopped, there is one on the winning line where the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel. One area on the winning line where the "Red 7" symbol is stopped on the left reel against the area number that can draw the "Blue 7" symbol comprising the combination of (2) in the range of 4 frames When the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result indicating that the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) stops is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, the left reel "Red 7" symbol has stopped On the prize line, one (2) "Blue 7" symbol is stopped and displayed a result of the combination constitutes a is derived. In addition, at least one of the area numbers different from the area number for specifying the display result of the stop of the “blue 7” symbol on the winning line in which the “red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel is set. On the other hand, the number of frames to be drawn that specifies “Cherry Replay Cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols, “Cherry Bell Cherry” of the 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols is determined. When a reel stop operation is detected, any one of the 11th to 13th symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry” and the 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as a display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  That is, when only one (2) is elected, at least one left (2) is on the winning line of the left reel while at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. When the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination is stopped, the area number for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye and the area number for identifying the display result constituting one (2) combination are obtained. A different stop control table is created.

  When only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. ) Is not stopped, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, one on the winning line of the middle reel ( In the stop control table for the right reel created when the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of 2) are not stopped, “10” to “12” of the above-mentioned “No. When the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is specified is determined and a stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, Blue 7 "is derived as a result display, since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  The middle reel stop control table created when none of the winning combinations is won in the normal gaming state shows the numbers 11 to 13 for any area number regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels. The number of draw-in frames for which display results other than the symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 21st, 1st and 2nd “Cherry Bell Cherry” are specified is determined. In the stop control table for the right reel that is created when not selected, a pull-in frame that specifies a display result other than “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” for symbols 10 to 12 for any area number. Since the number is fixed, there is no chance that the chance will be finalized.

  In addition, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating In the case where only one (1) or one (2) is won in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel has already stopped and the middle reel is still In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created in the rotating state, the “cherry replay cherry”, No. 21, No. 1, No. 1, No. 2, and No. 11 mentioned above for the specific area number are used. It is created when the number of draws that specify “Cherry Bell Cherry” in the design is fixed, but none of the roles are won in the normal gaming state In the stop control table for the middle reel, displays other than the “cherry replay cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols and the “cherry bell cherry” of the 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols for the specific area number described above. The number of incoming frames for which the result is specified is determined. For this reason, when the bonus or one (1), one (2) is won, the middle reel stop operation is performed at the timing of the specific area number, so that the display result constituting the chance eye On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the middle reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  In addition, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. If the right reel stop control table is created in the normal game state and only one (1) or one (2) is elected, at least one of the reels has already stopped. In the right reel stop control table created when the right reel is still rotating, the “replay / cherry / blue 7” of the 10th to 12th symbols described above with respect to the specific area number are used. The number of draws to be specified is determined, whereas in the normal gaming state, when any combination is not won, and at least one of the reels In the right reel stop control table created when the right reel is still rotating, the “replay cherry” of the 10th to 12th symbols for the specific area number described above is displayed.・ The number of frames to be drawn that specifies the display result other than Blue 7 is specified. Therefore, when the bonus or one (1), one (2) is won, the right reel stop operation is performed at the timing of the specific area number, and the display result constituting the chance eye In contrast, if no winning combination is won, even if the right reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  Next, the symbol arrangement in the left reel will be described with reference to FIG. 2. The 9th “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus, 1 (2) is the upper stage of the left reel, The display mode (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stops at either the middle or lower level, the combination of the big bonus (2) and the combination of one (1) number 16 and 18 The display mode (region numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) in which the “Blue 7” symbol of the number stops at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel Each is arranged beyond the maximum drawing range of 4 frames.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 9 to 13) at which a maximum of 4 frames of the 9th “red 7” symbol can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, Pull up the 16th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line, or draw the 18th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be played, the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 is drawn up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line I can't do that either. That is, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. The Big Bonus (1), Regular Bonus (1), 1 Sheet (in the position where the “Red 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing of the range that can be pulled in Since the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of 2) and the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and one (1) are arranged, the “red 7” symbol is arranged. "There is no stop operation position that can aim at the" blue 7 "symbol at the same time.

  In other words, in the left reel stop control table created when the big bonus (2) or one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, the “Blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line. Created when the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of frames to draw the display mode to be determined and the big bonus (1) or regular bonus, 1 (2) are won in the normal gaming state. In the stop control table of the left reel, the “red 7” symbol is different from the region numbers 9 to 15 in which the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “red 7” symbol stops on any pay line is different. There is no stop operation position at which the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state, a display mode (No. 6 “cherry” symbols constituting a combination of cherries from which more medals are paid out than one (1) stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel. Area numbers 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” symbols that make up a single (1) combination are on the upper, middle or lower level of the left reel. The display modes (area numbers 14 to 16, 15 to 17, 16 to 18, 17 to 19, and 18 to 20) to be stopped are arranged so as to exceed four frames that are the maximum drawing range.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 10, a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (area numbers 6 to 12) at which a maximum of 4 frames of “No. 6” cherry can be drawn and stopped on any pay line. If done, draw up to 4 frames of the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design and stop it on one of the winning lines, or place the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be pulled in and stopped on any of the winning lines, the “Cherry” symbol of No. 6 is a maximum of 4 frames. It cannot be pulled in and stopped on any winning line. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Cherry” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. In the normal gaming state, more medals are paid out to a position where the “Cherry” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing within the range that can be drawn into Since the “Cherry” symbol No. 6 constituting the cherry combination and the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (1) are arranged, the “Cherry” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol are arranged respectively. There is no stop operation position that can aim at the same time.

  In other words, in the stop control table for the left reel created when the cherry is elected in the normal gaming state, the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “cherry” symbol stops on one of the winning lines is determined. In the stop control table of the left reel created when the area numbers 6 to 12 and one (1) is won in the normal game state, the display indicating that the “blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line Since the region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of frames into which the mode is drawn are different are different, there is no stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  On the other hand, the display pattern (area number 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and chance chance that the 6th “cherry” symbol stops at the upper, middle or lower level of the left reel The “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are arranged within the maximum drawing range of 4 frames. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10, a stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) in which the number of drawn frames for pulling up the 6th “cherry” symbol up to 4 frames and stopping on any winning line is determined, and The number of draws that will stop the “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols, which constitutes the chance when one (1) is won, is determined. Since the stop operation positions (region numbers 4 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 14) partially overlap, the stop operation positions (region numbers 6 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 12) are stopped. If an operation is made, if the cherries are won, the 6th “cherry” symbol will stop on one of the winning lines, and if one is won (1), the chance will be configured "Replay watermelon bell" of No. 2-4, 8 ~ "Bell red 7 Bell" of the No. 0 pattern is to be stopped.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a continues to rotate the reels for which the stop operation has not yet been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation is temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  The CPU 41a according to the present embodiment performs an abnormal winning determination that determines whether or not a combination that is not permitted in the game is on the winning line when all the reels are stopped. When a combination that is not permitted in the game is arranged on the winning line, the game is controlled to an abnormal winning error state to disable the progress of the game. The abnormal winning error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated as in the case of the RAM abnormal error described above. It will not be released until it is set.

  The abnormal winning determination will be described. First, the CPU 41a sets a winning flag indicating a winning combination allowed in the game at the time of the internal lottery in the internal winning flag storing work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c, and all reels are set. A winning symbol flag that indicates a combination that is on the winning line at the time of stopping is set. Then, an abnormal winning determination flag is created from the winning flag, and it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the generated abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag.

  The winning flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating a winning combination permitted in the game, and when the value of the bit individually determined for each winning combination is 1, This indicates that the winning of the winning combination is allowed. When the winning is 0, it indicates that the winning of the winning combination is not allowed.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), the 3rd bit corresponds to the regular bonus, the 10th bit corresponds to the replay, the 11th bit. The bit corresponds to JAC, the twelfth bit corresponds to one (1), the thirteenth bit corresponds to one (2), the fourteenth bit corresponds to bell, and the fifteenth bit corresponds to cherry. The third to ninth bits do not correspond to any combination.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of winning combinations may be permitted in one game. In this case, the value of each bit corresponding to the permitted winning combination is set to 1 in the winning flag. It has become.

  The abnormal winning determination flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating a winning combination permitted in the game, but the bit value individually determined for each winning combination is 0. In some cases, it indicates that the winning of the combination is permitted, and in the case of 1, it indicates that the winning of the combination is not permitted. That is, the abnormal winning determination flag is a value obtained by inverting 0 and 1 of the winning flag.

  The winning symbol flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating the winning combination on the winning line, and when the value of the bit individually determined for each winning is 1, Indicates that a winning has been won, and when it is 0, it indicates that the winning combination has not won. The winning symbol flag is the same as the internal winning flag. As shown in FIG. 11A, the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), and the 3rd bit corresponds to the regular bonus. 10th bit corresponds to replay, 11th bit corresponds to JAC, 12th bit corresponds to 1 (1), 13th bit corresponds to 1 (2), 14th bit corresponds to Bell, 15th bit corresponds to Cherry Yes. The third to ninth bits do not correspond to any combination. By comparing the winning symbol flag and the winning flag, the CPU 41a performs an abnormal winning determination.

  The CPU 41a determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred by performing an AND operation on the abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag. In the abnormal winning determination flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination allowed in the game is 0, and when this winning combination is won, that is, the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 1. However, even if no winning is made, that is, when the value of the corresponding bit of the winning design flag is 0, the result of the logical product operation is always 0. On the other hand, of the abnormal winning determination flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the combination that is not permitted in the game is 1, and when this combination does not win, that is, the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 0. In this case, the result of the logical product operation is 0, but when the winning is made, that is, when the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 1, the result of the logical product operation is 1. For this reason, if even one unacceptable winning combination wins, the result of the logical product operation of the abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag becomes a value other than 0. In this case, the abnormal winning is determined. Will be.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a processing flow until the CPU 41a determines an abnormal prize paying attention to a change in a register value.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, at the start of processing execution, the upper 8 bits of the winning flag are stored in the H register, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag are stored in the L register, and the B register is stored in the B register. Suppose that the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored, and the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, first, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag stored in the L register are stored in the A register. Further, all bits of the A register are inverted, and a logical product (AND) of the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag stored in the B register and the value of the A register is calculated, and the result is stored in the A register. To do. As a result, [all bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] is stored in the A register.

  This [all-bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] is when the winning specified by the winning symbol is a winning permitted by the internal winning flag [00H], otherwise, it is a value other than [00H] and it is determined that there is an abnormal winning. For example, as shown in FIG. 11B, among the lower 8 bits, the 0th bit of the internal winning flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1) Winning}, and the 0th bit of the winning symbol flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1 ) Winning}, [all bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] = [FEH AND 01H] is [00H]. On the other hand, if the 0th bit of the internal winning flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1) Winning} and the second bit of the winning design flag is 1 {Regular Bonus Winning}, all of the [Internal Winning Flag (Lower 8 Bits)] Bit inversion value AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] = [FEH AND 04H] is 04H, and it is determined that there is an abnormal winning.

  Similarly, by using the H register and the C register, for the upper 8 bits, the [all bit inversion value of the internal winning flag (upper 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (upper 8 bits)] is calculated and Store in A register. If the A register is other than [00H], it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

  Next, error control associated with medal payout will be described. The CPU 41a performs control for driving out the hopper motor 34 and paying out medals in accordance with the winning of the small role and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets). At this time, if medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are clogged, the driving of the hopper motor 34 is stopped, and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time despite the hopper motor 34 being driven, the hopper motor 34 is stopped once and the hopper motor 34 is restarted several times. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even after the trial, it is determined as a hopper error (an error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper), and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. The error states associated with these medal jamming errors and hopper errors are canceled by operating the reset switch 23 and the reset / setting switch 38, and control for paying out the remaining medals is performed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into important work, general work, special work, set value work 1 to 3, non-saved work, unused area, and stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out during the big bonus. The special work is a work that stores data that is initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work 1 is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. The setting value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. The set value work 2 is a set value used when determining whether or not the set value read from the set value work 1 when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process matches the set value stored at the end of the setting. Is stored, and the setting value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. The setting value work 3 is whether or not the setting value read from the setting value work 1 when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process matches the setting value used when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process of the previous game. This is a work for storing a setting value used when determining whether or not the setting value of the previous game is stored, and a setting value newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored When the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process for each game, the value is updated to the value read from the set value work 1. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is satisfied by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, the in-use stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 starts from the four at the end of one game when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed before the start of setting (before the transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, and at the start. When the initialization condition is satisfied, four types of initializations with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed before the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and shifts to the setting change mode. All areas except the middle stack area (including the unused area and the unused stack area) are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, to initialize the storage area of the RAM 41c is to clear the data in the target area to 0, that is, to update the value of the target area to 0. The area data may be rewritten to a predetermined initial value.

  Next, an external output signal output from the slot machine 1 to an external device will be described. The CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 pays out in response to the occurrence of a regular bonus, an RB signal indicating the big bonus, a BB signal indicating the big bonus, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number, and a winning. Output control for outputting a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals as an external output signal. As shown in FIG. 12, the game control board 40 can be connected to an external device via the external output board 110, and an external output signal output by the output control of the CPU 41a is connected to the external output board 110. Output to external devices.

  FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing the output status of the RB signal and BB signal when a big bonus occurs.

  When the big bonus occurs, the CPU 41a first starts outputting the BB signal (from OFF to ON). Next, during the big bonus that starts the output of the RB signal with the occurrence of the regular bonus (from OFF to ON), the transition to the regular bonus is repeated until the end condition is satisfied, so it is always controlled to the regular bonus. However, as shown in FIG. 13, when the regular bonus is once ended and the next regular bonus is started, the CPU 41a stops outputting the RB signal indicating the occurrence of the regular bonus to be ended ( When the output waiting time tw elapses, the output is started again (from OFF to ON). When the end condition of the big bonus is established and the regular bonus ends with this, the output of the RB signal is stopped (from the ON state to the OFF state), and then the output of the BB signal is also stopped (ON) To OFF state).

  Thus, when the regular bonus ends during the big bonus and the regular bonus starts again, the output of the RB signal is stopped for the output waiting time tw, and then the output is started again. It is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by the external device that has input the RB signal. Note that the output waiting time tw may be a time longer than the level at which it is possible to determine that the signal has been interrupted by the external device.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a command, a standby command, an abort command, an error command, a setting start command, and an initialization command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the winning flag and the type of the winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the game is started by operating the start switch 7.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and is transmitted when the transition to the standby state is made after a certain time has elapsed without setting the bet amount after the end of one game.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  Each of these commands is generated in an activation process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 receives a command transmitted by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, and displays the liquid crystal display based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. The various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. The control device corresponding to the type of the command is referred to, and the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even when the effect has not been completed to the end, when a new command is received, the effect that has been executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table also includes specific commands (reel stop command indicating automatic stop, winning determination command indicating occurrence of winning, payout start command, payout end, gaming state command indicating end of big bonus, standby command, stop Command, error command, setting start command, initialization command, etc.) are stored, and the CPU 91a is set in the game when receiving these specific commands. Regardless of the effect pattern being performed, a specific control pattern corresponding to the command is referred to, and the effect device is controlled based on the control pattern.

  When a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a winning is received, a winning effect pattern for executing a winning effect according to the type of winning is referred to as a control pattern. In particular, when a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a big bonus winning is received, a BB winning pattern for executing a BB winning effect peculiar to the big bonus winning is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a payout start command is received, a payout pattern for outputting payout sound effects is referred to as a control pattern. Further, when a payout end command is received during the output of the payout sound effect, the output of the payout sound effect is stopped. When the payout start command is received, unlike the other commands, the effect that is being executed is not executed and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. Sound effects are output. That is, other effects and effects accompanying payout are executed in parallel.

  When a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received, an ending pattern for executing an ending effect indicating the end of the big bonus is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a standby pattern for executing a standby effect is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the standby effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning. As will be described later, the above-mentioned BB winning effect and ending effect are in the progress stage where the effect is dynamically executed and the state when the progress stage ends (for example, the final screen on the liquid crystal display 51). Is continuously displayed and the final stage sound effect is repeatedly output), and the BB winning effect and ending effect reach the final stage when an error occurs. In such a case, when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect and the ending effect are not executed from the elapsed stage, but return to the final stage.

  When the setting start command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the initialization command is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the initialization command is received, the standby effect is executed.

  The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 performs RAM parity adjustment so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 each time the timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed is executed. Data is calculated and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and is based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is designed to return to the production state before the interruption. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. If the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage at the time of power interruption, the BB winning effect or ending effect is not executed from the elapsed stage at the next start-up, but the final stage state. It will return to. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized. It has become.

  Further, the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 starts the reel rotation when a predetermined time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without stopping the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R after the reel rotation is started. After the command is acquired, when the predetermined time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without acquiring the reel stop command, or after the stop operation of the first reel or the second reel is performed, the next reel stop operation is performed. When a predetermined time (60 seconds or 30 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without being performed, that is, after acquiring a reel stop command for the first and second reels, a predetermined time (without acquiring a new reel stop command) In this embodiment, when 60 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, a promotion notification that prompts a stop operation of the reel is performed.

  Specifically, after the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated effectively for a predetermined time, as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b). On the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, a text message “Please stop the reels” is displayed as a prompt notification for prompting the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R.

  As a notification pattern (notification mode) of the promotion notification in the present embodiment, for example, the message is displayed in black characters in a white background frame in the lower area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 on which a predetermined effect image is displayed. There are two types of notifications: notification pattern 1 (see FIG. 14A) to be displayed and notification pattern 2 (see FIG. 14B) in which the message is displayed in white characters in a black background frame. The pattern is set by a notification pattern lottery performed for each game in accordance with the winning status of the special combination (big bonus (1), (2) flag, regular bonus flag) in the game.

  The notification pattern lottery is performed when an internal winning command transmitted from the main control unit 41 is acquired, and the notification pattern won in the notification pattern lottery is a notification pattern applied when executing a promotion notification in the game. Set as In this embodiment, when the game is a bonus game, the notification pattern 1 is set uniformly without performing the notification pattern lottery.

  As shown in the notification pattern distribution table of FIG. 15, the winning probability of each of these notification patterns differs depending on the internal winning status of the bonus flag. The lottery is won with a probability of 50% when the big bonus (1), (2) and regular bonus internal winning flags are set, and with a probability of 95% when the bonus flag is not won. The notification pattern 2 is won with a probability of 50% when a bonus is won, and is won with a probability of 5% when a bonus is not won.

  In other words, in this embodiment, two types of notification patterns 1 and 2 having different modes are registered in advance, and at the time of winning the bonus, notification is made with a higher probability (50%) than when the bonus is not won (5%). Since the pattern 2 is selected, when the promotion notification is executed, the game is displayed when the notification screen based on the notification pattern 2 is displayed rather than when the notification screen based on the notification pattern 1 is displayed. One can expect that big bonuses (1), (2) and regular bonuses are won.

  Further, in this embodiment, any stop switch between the start of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the lapse of 60 seconds that is the first notification waiting time (predetermined notification waiting time) has elapsed. When the effective operation of 8L, 8C, 8R is not detected, the above-described promotion notification is executed. Specifically, when the reel rotation start command transmitted from the main control unit 41 is acquired, the counter is set by setting the first value (60 seconds in this embodiment) as the counter value of the notification counter assigned to the RAM 91c. Subtraction (timekeeping) of the value is started, and when the counter value becomes 0, control for displaying a notification screen based on the set notification pattern on the liquid crystal display 51 is performed.

  Further, when a reel stop command is acquired from the main control unit 41 until the counter value reaches 0 after the subtraction of the notification counter is started, it is assumed that an effective stop operation has been detected, and the counter value of the notification counter Is cleared and when the promotion notification is performed, the display of the notification screen based on the notification pattern is cleared (terminated) and the promotion notification is ended.

  If all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped rotating when the reel stop command is acquired, the game ends. However, any reel 2L, 2C, When 2R is rotating, the measurement of the notification waiting time is started again when the last effective stop operation is detected, that is, from the time when the stop command is finally acquired.

  Specifically, when the promotion notification is not yet executed in the game at the time of the last acquisition of the stop command, the first value (60 seconds in this embodiment) is set as the counter value of the notification counter. set. In addition, when the promotion notification has been executed once or more in the game, a second value (30 seconds in this embodiment) smaller than the first value is set as the counter value of the notification counter. Then, subtraction of the counter value of the notification counter is started.

  When the promotion notification is already executed at least once in the game at the time when the stop command is finally acquired, the second value smaller than the first value as the counter value of the notification counter (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) is set in a state where effective stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is not performed again in the game even though the promotion notification is executed once or more in the game. This is to avoid a decrease in the operating rate by executing the promotion notification earlier than the first time.

  Further, the CPU 91a starts the promotion notification based on the notification pattern set at that time when the counter value becomes 0 after the start of subtraction of the notification counter. For example, when the counter value becomes 0, When the notification pattern 2 having a higher expectation level for the internal winning of the bonus flag than the notification pattern 1 is set, it is displayed on the variable display section corresponding to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R stopped at that time. When the displayed result is a complete loss, that is, a display mode that can be displayed when any winning flag is not set, the notification based on the notification pattern 1 is started. In spite of the fact that the display mode derived in (3) is clearly completely losing, the notification pattern 2 with high expectation for the bonus Also display a notification screen based, because you can not increase the degree of expectation for the player's bonus, it is possible to avoid the execution of meaningless notification.

  In this embodiment, the notification waiting time is measured by subtraction of the counter value. However, the notification waiting time may be measured by addition of the counter value. The promotion notification may be started when the value reaches the second value or when the second value smaller than the first value is reached.

  Further, the CPU 91a determines whether or not the game is a bonus game when the counter value reaches 0 after the start of the subtraction of the notification counter. Even if is set, the notification pattern 1 is set. In other words, during the bonus, even if the notification screen based on the notification pattern 2 with a high expectation level for the bonus is displayed, the player's expectation level for the bonus cannot be increased, so that execution of meaningless notification can be avoided.

  Further, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 continuously executes over a plurality of games, and executes a continuous effect for notifying whether or not the bonus has been finally won.

  FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing a flow of continuous production.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the continuous performance is executed in response to the chance eye being stopped in the normal gaming state. As described above, the chance item is a display mode that appears only when one of the bonuses is won, or when the one-piece combination (1) or the one-piece combination (2) is won. Is a display mode that stops at a higher rate than when none of the bonuses are won, and a display mode that involves a transition from the next game to the RT of two games. Therefore, the continuous performance triggered by the chance is executed at a higher rate when one of the bonuses is won than when none of the bonuses are won, and the two-game RT is performed. It is executed when there is a transition.

  In addition, there are a plurality of types of patterns in which two or three games continue in the continuous performance, and when the chance stops, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), any one of these patterns can be selected. A pattern is selected, and a continuous effect is executed based on the selected pattern.

  In the present embodiment, when the chance is stopped as described above, the game proceeds to RT of two games, and during that time, the winning probability of replay is higher than in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, if a replay is won while the bonus is being carried over, the control where the replay is aligned on the winning line is prioritized over the control where the bonus is aligned on the winning line, and the resulting bonus is not aligned on the winning line. Although controlled, it becomes difficult to align the bonuses, but in the continuous production, the production continues for two games that are the same as the number of continuous games of RT or three games that are one game more than the number of continuous games of RT. . For this reason, after the start of the continuous production, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at the bonus, the replay is almost complete and the bonus is won during the period until the continuous production ends (in the case of 3 games, the period excluding the final game). It becomes a state where it cannot be determined whether or not. Also, even if the replay is not complete and the targeted bonus is not aligned, a pattern different from the targeted pattern ("Blue 7" if "Red 7", "Red 7" if "Blue 7") Since there is a possibility that it has been missed and there is almost no chance that there will be no continuous replays, the bonus win will be denied while the continuous production continues (excluding the final game in the case of 3 games) There is no end.

  If the chance stops during execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is not newly executed. Further, after winning one of the bonuses, the continuous effect is executed even once, and if the bonus is announced, the continuous effect is not further executed.

  Next, the content of the continuous effect process will be described.

  All the continuous effects are performed by displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, the effects for each individual game in the continuous effects are all started when the start switch 7 is operated, and are ended when all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. There are two types of performance results for each game other than the final game: player side attacks and player side damage, and final game results are two types of player wins and losses. However, there are many types of production processes.

  As described above, the continuous effect is started when the chance is derived as the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. And in the continuous production triggered by the chance chance being derived based on the winning of one of the bonuses, all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the game (final game) in which the continuous production ends. When the operation stops, the fact that the bonus is won (player win) is definitely notified.

  In addition, in the case of continuous production triggered by chances being derived without winning any bonus, if no bonus is won between the start of the continuous production and the end of the game, continuous production will be performed. As a result, the result of the loss (player loss), that is, the fact that none of the bonuses has been won is notified. On the other hand, one of the bonuses was won from the start of the continuous production until the end, and when the bonus won by the end of the continuous production did not win, the continuous production was terminated and the result of the loss was reported. As it is, the player is notified of contents different from the situation at the time.

  For this reason, at the start of the final game, it is determined whether any bonus has been won after the production has started, and if any bonus has not been won after the continuous production has started, At the end of the game, you will be notified of the result of the losing, and if you win any bonus after starting the continuous production, will you be surely notified that you have won the bonus by replacing the result of the final game production? The additional effect is executed in the next game without replacement, and it is definitely notified that the bonus is won by this additional effect.

  Regardless of whether it was announced as a result of a continuous performance or as a result of an additional performance, if a final notification that a bonus has been won has been made, the bet number is set in the next game In addition, the type of bonus that is won at a predetermined rate (big bonus (1) or big bonus (2), regular bonus) may be notified.

  There are a plurality of patterns in the continuous effect and the additional effect. FIGS. 16B to 16D are diagrams showing a continuous effect selection table for selecting a pattern of continuous effects and additional effects. There are three types of continuous effect selection tables: a non-winning time table shown in FIG. 16 (b), a winning time table shown in FIG. 16 (c), and an additional effect table shown in FIG. 16 (d). The pattern of the continuous performance is determined by referring to the non-winning time table or the winning time table according to a random number for selecting the continuous performance pattern.

  The non-winning time table shown in FIG. 16B is a table for selecting a pattern of continuous effects that is started when a chance is derived in a state where no bonus is won. In the non-winning time table, the contents of effects to be replaced in the final game when any bonus is won before the game in which the continuous effects performed in accordance with the pattern selected according to this are completed are also registered. In particular, content that is not included when there is no replacement is registered as the content of the effect that is replaced. For this reason, when one of the bonuses is won in the middle of the continuous production and the content of the production is replaced, the production in a different form from the production in the case where the content of the production is not replaced is performed.

  The winning time table shown in FIG. 16C is a table for selecting a continuous effect pattern that is started when a chance is derived by winning any of the bonuses. Regardless of which table the continuous effect pattern is selected, the number of games in which the continuous effect continues is two games or three games.

  The additional effect table shown in FIG. 16D is for selecting a pattern of an additional effect that is performed after the continuous effect ends when a new bonus is won in a state where the continuous effect has already been performed. It is a table. The additional effect pattern is selected in accordance with the continuous effect pattern performed at that time. Further, the contents of the additional effects are registered that are not included in the continuous effects. For this reason, when an additional effect is performed, an effect different from the continuous effect is performed.

  Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the setting of bets and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting bets) and effects. FIGS. 17 to 26 are timing charts showing a period during which the setting of the bet number is allowed and a period during which the credit settlement is allowed.

  As shown in FIG. 17, while the game is not being executed, the setting of the bet number and the credit settlement are permitted. In this state, the bet number is set by inserting a medal or using the credit. Settings are controlled to be possible. If a bet number can be set and a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state is not set, the bet number is incremented by one each time a medal is detected. Further, if a prescribed number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, a credit is added by one each time a medal is detected. When the credit reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the insertion of the medal is prohibited. . If the credits remain, the number of bets is set according to these switches by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, and the amount is subtracted from the credits. Further, if the credits remain or the bet number is set, the operation of the settlement switch 10 is used to set the medal and the bet amount stored as credits by driving the hopper motor 34. The given amount of medals is paid out and returned to the player, and credits and bets are subtracted according to the medals paid out.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are permitted, and the game is started, the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are prohibited at that time. Specifically, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the settlement switch 10 is invalidated. The time when the game is started is not the time when the rotation of the reel is started, but the time when the control stage is shifted by operating the start switch 7. This is because a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, and there is a case where a wait is applied. At this time, the start of reel rotation waits, but the game is started as a control stage.

  Thereafter, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When the display result is derived, it is determined that the game has ended, and when the end of the game is determined, the setting of the bet amount and the prohibition of credit settlement are lifted, and the setting of the bet amount and credit settlement are permitted. It becomes a state. As an exception, when a replay win occurs, the bet number is automatically set, so the setting of the bet number by the player's operation remains prohibited. In this state, Credit settlement is also prohibited.

  As a result of stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, if a winning with a medal payout has occurred, display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as shown in FIG. At the time, the end of the game is not determined, and when the medal payout accompanying the occurrence of the winning is completed, the end of the game is determined, and at that time, the setting of the bet amount and the prohibition of the credit settlement are canceled, and the bet Number setting and credit settlement are permitted.

  Further, if the big bonus winning is generated as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R being stopped, as shown in FIG. 19, when the display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, Is determined to be completed, and the CPU 91a executes the BB winning effect. The stage at the BB winning stage is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage. First, when the stage shifts to the stage where the dynamic stage is executed over the stage time of the stage at the BB winning stage, the stage is completed. The process moves to the final stage where the state continues. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and this elapsed time is set longer than the period until the above-mentioned BB winning effect is reached at the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the time effect stage waiting time is reached, and the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the stage waiting time for the BB winning effect. Thus, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, the period until the elapsed time measured by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time for the BB winning effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect at the time of power interruption, and at the next start-up, the BB winning effect effect is based on the backed up counter value. Since the waiting time is restarted, the time (Tb period in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the interruption from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect is restored when the interruption is restored. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, when a power interruption occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. Is done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, when a power interruption occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, a flag indicating that the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, or a BB winning effect) Only when the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. If it is backed up that the BB winning effect is in the final stage, the BB winning effect will return to the final stage. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 22, after the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred is determined, the elapsed time measured by the CPU 41a is the period until the stage waiting time for the BB winning effect is reached. If a payment error occurs during the payment of credits and a payout error occurs during the payment of the medal associated with the payment, the time elapsed since the end of the game is determined to be an error. Resume from the state of time. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect even during the error occurrence, and after canceling the error, the BB winning effect based on the maintained counter value. When the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) is removed when the payout error is canceled. When the period of (medium Td) elapses, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in an elapsed stage. It is executed from the beginning. On the other hand, although not particularly illustrated, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect has reached the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is at the final stage as in the case of power interruption. It returns in the state of. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data only on whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of an error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It will return in the state of. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  In addition, in the game during the big bonus, as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R being stopped, the big bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, some wins occur and the total number of payouts during the big bonus exceeds 465 If the stop function is not set, as shown in FIG. 22, the end of the game is determined at the time when the payout of the medal is completed, and the ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. . The ending effect is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage, as in the case of the BB winning effect. First, a transition is made to an elapsed stage in which a dynamic effect is executed over the effect time of the ending effect. When is finished, the process proceeds to the final stage where the state is continued. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the waiting time is reached, and the number of bets is set when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. The prohibition is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, a period until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41 a reaches the ending effect stage waiting time after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. In other words, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the ending effect production waiting time at the time of power interruption, and at the next activation, measures the ending effect production waiting time based on the counter value that is backed up. Therefore, when power is restored, the bet is made when the time (Tb in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed. The prohibition of the setting of the number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, when a power interruption occurs in a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, after the flag or ending effect indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is executed). (Elapsed time) is backed up, and the next time it is activated, it is backed up that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage (for example, when the flag indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is set, or the ending effect) If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is It will return in the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined, the elapsed time measured by the CPU 41a is in a period until reaching the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect. For example, if a credit checkout is performed and a payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying this checkout, and the payout error is canceled, the elapsed time from when the end of the game is determined is counted. Resume from the state when the error occurred. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the ending effect stage waiting time even during the occurrence of an error, and after the error is released, the ending effect stage waiting time is based on the maintained counter value. Therefore, when the payout error is canceled, the time (Td period in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) from the production waiting time of the ending effect is released. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. That is, the sub-control unit 91 maintains only data indicating whether the ending effect being executed is in the elapsed stage or the final stage when the error occurs, and when the error is canceled, the data indicating that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage If the ending effect is maintained, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and if the data indicating that the ending effect is in the final stage is maintained, the ending effect returns to the final stage state. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  Further, if the big bonus end condition is satisfied and the stop function is set, as shown in FIG. 23, the end of the game is determined when the medal payout ends. The above-mentioned ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. Since the stop state is controlled when the waiting time is reached, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated even when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the rendering waiting time of the ending effect. Until the bet is set, the setting of the bet number remains prohibited. When the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the setting of the bet number is also released. The bet number setting is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined, the elapsed time until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time for the ending effect. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, at the time of restoration of power interruption, after a time (period Tf in the figure) excluding time (period Te in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or reset / When the setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24, when a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 26, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, it is determined that the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the stage waiting time for the BB winning effect. For example, if a credit checkout is performed and a payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying this checkout, and the payout error is canceled, the elapsed time from when the end of the game is determined is counted. Resume from the state when the error occurred. That is, when the payout error is canceled, after the time (time period Tg in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tg in the figure) from the rendering waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, the end condition of the big bonus is that the total number of payouts in the big bonus exceeds 465. Therefore, in a game in which the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied, the medals must be paid out. When the payout ends, the end of the game is determined. For example, when applying that the big bonus reaches the specified number of games as an end condition, in the game where the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied In some cases, medals are not paid out. In such a case, the end of the game is determined when the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs the startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. This is a process to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and if the voltage drop signal is input, any processing is performed except for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. There is no loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal is not input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), and the states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic settlement switch 29 are acquired. Validity / invalidity of the stop function and automatic settlement function is set in a specific register of the CPU 41a (Sa4). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. An error code indicating abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If power interruption interrupt processing is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption. In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, so an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 28, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is confirmed, it is determined whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error (Sb3), and if it is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error, After initialization 1 is performed to initialize all the storage areas except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c (Sb4), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code is not an error other than a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sb5), and the reset / setting switch 38 is detected. If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sb6). If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, the process returns to the step Sb4. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb5 or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sb6, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb7 ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in the step Sb1 (Sb8), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormality error, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated to return to the original processing even if the error state is canceled. In the case of error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated.

  Returning to FIG. 27, if it is determined in step Sa9 that the data for destructive diagnosis is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the non-saved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sa11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa12). Next, each register is restored to the state before the power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa13), the interrupt is permitted (Sa14), and the process that was executed last before the power interruption is returned.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in the step of Sa6, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa15), The value (0 at this time) stored in the set value work 1 is corrected to 1 (Sa16). Next, interruption is permitted (Sa17), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 29, that is, the setting change mode is entered (Sa18). After the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to the game process.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 29, the setting value stored in the setting value work 1 of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work 1 is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process. Is 1) (Sc1).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sc2, the setting value read in the step of Sc1. 1 is added (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sc6). ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set values selected at that time are stored in the set value works 1 to 3 of the RAM 41c, respectively, and the set values are confirmed. (Sc7) Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). If it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 27 and the process proceeds to the game process.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to error processing. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until it is interrupted, no power interruption processing is performed even if the power is interrupted. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process, and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the game is started, the game cannot be resumed even if the CPU 41a is restarted except when the setting key switch 37 is turned on.

  Once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state, and after all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where the bet number can be set, sets a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state, and executes a process of determining the bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined that a prize is generated in step Sd4, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  31 and 32 are flowcharts showing the control content of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in the step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and the specified number according to the gaming state (the specified number of betting numbers determined according to the gaming state. 1 is set when in the regular bonus, and 3 is set when in the normal gaming state and RT.) Is set in the RAM 41c (Se2), and a replay game flag indicating that the game is a replay game is stored in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether the game is a replay game based on whether it is set (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se4), the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the BET counter is It is determined whether or not the number is a specified number (Se5). If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the process returns to the step of Se4, and if the value of the BET counter is the specified number, a insertion prohibition flag indicating that a medal cannot be inserted is set. The RAM 41c is set (Se6), and the process proceeds to the Se8 step.

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is not a replay game, settings before waiting to be made are performed (Se7), and the process proceeds to step Se8. In the setting before waiting for input, the input disable flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, and the detection of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is validated.

  In step Se8, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c. When it is determined in step Se8 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. If it is determined that the medal can not be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the off state, and the medal flow path is the path on the medal payout exit 9 side. As a result, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se10), and the process proceeds to Step Se11.

  In step Se11, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in the step of Se11, the process proceeds to the step of Se18. If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the insertion of the medal is performed based on whether or not the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is possible to enter the token (Se12). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Step Se18.

  If the medal can be inserted in the step of Se12, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to determine whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se13). If the value is not the specified number, 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se14), and the process returns to the Se8 step.

  If the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number in the step of Se13, 1 is added to the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c (Se15), and whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c (Se17), and the process returns to the step of Se8. .

  In step Se18, it is determined whether an operation of the start switch 7 is detected. If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se18, the process proceeds to the step of Se22. If the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se19).

  If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number in the step of Se19, the process returns to the step of Se8, and if the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the input impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c and the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off. The state is set, a medal flow path is used as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side, and insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se20), and a setting at the start of the game is performed (Se21). In the setting at the start of the game, detection of operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 is invalidated. Then, after the step of Se21, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, setting of bets based on the insertion of medals, detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is prohibited, and the adjustment of credits based on the detection of the operation of the adjustment switch 10 is prohibited. It becomes. Note that the insertion impossible flag is not cleared until the BET process of the next game, and the detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is not cleared until the BET process of the next game. The bet number setting is prohibited until the BET process. In addition, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not cleared until the next game BET processing except when the big bonus is won or the big bonus is ended. (Including medals used for setting) are prohibited. When the big bonus is won or the big bonus is over, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is effective when the game is finished (when the reel is stopped or when the medal payout is finished) without waiting for the BET process of the next game. Credits can be settled.

  In the step of Se22, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se22, the process proceeds to the step of Se27, and if the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se23). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se23, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se24). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se24, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se25), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se26), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  In step Se27, it is determined whether or not an operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se27, the process proceeds to the step of Se32, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se28). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se28, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se29). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se29, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se30), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se31), and the process returns to the step of Se28.

  In the step of Se32, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se32, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the operation is based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se33). If the game is a replay game, the process returns to step Se8. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se33, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se34). If the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Se36, and the value of the BET counter is 0. Otherwise, a bet amount settlement flag indicating that the already set bet amount is to be settled is set in the RAM 41c (Se35), and the process proceeds to the step of Se36. In step Se36, the hopper motor 34 is driven to pay out medals corresponding to the value stored in the credit counter or BET counter, that is, medals stored as credits or medals used for setting the number of bets. Checkout process is performed to control the return. Then, after the settlement process in the step of Se36, the input impossible flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se37), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the settlement process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the settlement process, first, it is determined whether or not the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled based on whether or not the bet amount settlement flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sf1).

  If the medal used for setting the bet amount in the step of Sf1 is not settled, it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf2). If the value of the credit counter is 0, the settlement process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the original process.

  If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Sf2, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side. Insertion is prohibited (Sf3), and one medal payout process for performing payout control of one medal is performed (Sf4).

  In the medal payout process in step Sf4, if the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is not on, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to on. Then, the detection state of the payout sensor 35 is monitored, and when the payout sensor 35 detects the payout of one medal, it is determined that the medal is paid out, and the process proceeds to the next process. Further, when medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are jammed, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off, and an error code indicating a medal jammed error is set in the register. After that, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is once turned off, and no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even if the driving of the hopper motor 34 is retried several times. In this case, after an error code indicating a hopper error (an error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper) is set in the register, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. The error processing due to the medal jamming error or the hopper error is canceled by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38, and after the cancellation, the processing returns to the top of the single medal payout processing.

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf4, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 (Sf5), and it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf6). If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in step Sf6, the process returns to step Sf4. If the value of the credit counter is 0, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the driving is stopped. Later (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  If it is the settlement of medals used for setting the number of bets in the step of Sf1, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set to the medal payout exit. As a route on the 9th side, the insertion of medals is prohibited (Sf3), and the same medal payout process as in step Sf4 is performed (Sf9).

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf9, the value of the BET counter is decremented by 1 (Sf10), and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Sf11). If the value of the BET counter is not 0 in the step of Sf11, the process returns to the step of Sf9. If the value of the BET counter is 0, the betting number settlement flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sf12). After the drive state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the drive is stopped (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, the number of inserted medals, that is, the value of the BET counter, the prescribed number that is a predetermined number of inserted medals according to the game state of the game, and the values of the set value works 1 to 3 are calculated. Read (Sg1) and proceed to Sg2. The prescribed number is 3 in the normal gaming state and RT, and 1 in the regular bonus gaming state.

  In step Sg2, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted medals read in step Sg1 is a prescribed number. If the number of inserted medals is a prescribed number, the process proceeds to step Sg4. Proceed to step Sg3.

  In the step of Sg3, the inserted medal number is not the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, and the data stored in the RAM 41c may not be normal. Therefore, an error code indicating the RAM abnormality is stored in the register. Move on to error processing shown in.

  In the step of Sg4, a setting for determining whether or not the setting value used for the lottery based on the values of the setting value workpieces 1 to 3 read in the step of Sg1, that is, the setting value stored in the setting value workpiece 1 is appropriate. Perform value judgment processing.

  In the set value determination process, as shown in FIG. 35, a set value determination process 1 (Sg51), a set value determination process 2 (Sg52), and a set value determination process 3 (Sg53) are sequentially executed.

  In the set value determination process 1 in the step of Sg51, as shown in FIG. 36, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game is appropriate. It is determined whether or not the value is within the range (Sg61). If the value read from the set value work 1 is not a value within the range of 1 to 6, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg62). If the value read from the set value work 1 is a value in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to the set value determination process 2 in step Sg52.

  In the set value determination process 2 in the step of Sg52, as shown in FIG. 37, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 match, that is, the current game. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery matches the set value set at the previous setting change (Sg71), and the value read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 2 If the values do not match, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg72), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 28, and the values read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 2 If the value matches, the process proceeds to the set value determination process 3 in step Sg53.

  In the set value determination processing 3 in the step of Sg53, as shown in FIG. 38, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match, that is, the current game. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game (Sg81), and the value read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 3 If the two values do not match, the error code indicating the RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg82), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 28, and the value read from the set value work 1 and the set value work 3 If the read value matches, the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the setting value determination process, whether or not the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game is within an appropriate range, whether the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the previous setting change are set. By determining whether or not the set value matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game, respectively. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery of the game is an appropriate value, and if it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate value in at least one of the determinations, the above-described RAM abnormality error In the same manner as when the data in the RAM 41c is determined not to be normal at the time of startup, an error state due to a RAM abnormality error occurs, and the progress of the game is disabled. It has become as to be.

  In step Sg5, random number acquisition processing for acquiring a random number used in the game is performed, and the process proceeds to step Sg6. In the random number acquisition process, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the latched random number value is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. A predetermined logical operation is performed on the extracted random number, and the result is obtained as a random number.

  In the step of Sg6, the state number (any one of 0 to 4) is stored in the RAM 41c according to the game state of the game, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg7. In the step of Sg7, in the gaming state indicated by the state number, the first combination number to be drawn is stored in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to step Sg8. In the step of Sg7, when the state number is 0 or 1, that is, when any special combination is not carried over in the normal gaming state or RT, 1 is assigned as the first combination number (Big Bonus (1)) ) And if the status number is 2 or 3, that is, if any special role is carried over in the normal gaming state or RT, 10 (replay) is set as the first role number to be drawn When the state number is 4, that is, in the case of a regular bonus, 14 (bell) is set as the combination number to be drawn first.

  In the step of Sg8, it is checked whether or not the common flag registered in the role-specific table of FIG. 5 is 1 in association with the processing target number, and if it is 1, the process proceeds to the step of Sg9. If not, the process proceeds to step Sg10.

  In step Sg9, the address (see FIG. 5) of the storage area for the number of determination values in the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 5 in association with the role number to be processed is read. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg11.

  In the step of Sg10, first, the setting value stored in the RAM 41c is read, and further, the determination value of the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 5 in association with the processing target role number and the read setting value. Read the address of the number storage area. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg11.

  In the step of Sg11, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg9 or Sg10 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is set as a new random number value, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg12. It is determined whether an overflow has occurred when added to the random number value. The occurrence of an overflow indicates that the winning combination corresponding to the processing target winning number has been won. If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Sg16. If no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step Sg13.

  In the step of Sg13, whether or not the role number to be processed is the last role number to be selected according to the status number (the role number 14 if the status number is 0-3, the role number 17 if the status number is 4). That is, it is checked whether or not the lottery for all the lottery targets has been completed. If the lottery is the final lottery number according to the state number, the process proceeds to step Sg15. If it is not the last winning combination number according to the status number, the process proceeds to step Sg14.

  In step Sg15, the general combination storing work in which the general combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In step Sg14, 1 is added to the role number to be processed, and the process returns to step Sg8.

  In the step of Sg16, it is confirmed whether or not the combination number is 1 to 9, that is, a combination number indicating a special combination or a combination including a special combination. If the combination number is 1 to 9, the step of Sg17 is performed. If the combination number is not 1 to 9, the process proceeds to step Sg18.

  In the step of Sg17, a special combination winning flag corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set in the special combination storing work in which the special combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c. In the step of Sg18, the general combination storing work of the RAM 41c is set. In addition, the winning flag of the general combination corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. In the step of Sg18, when the combination numbers are 1 to 3, since the general combination is not won, the general combination storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared in this case.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Sh1), and the wait time must have elapsed. For example, it waits until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the step of Sh1, a wait time is newly set (Sh2).

  Next, the reel motor is set to start rotating, and the reel starts rotating (Sh3). Then, a stop control table corresponding to the game state of the game, the winning status of the combination, and the stop status of the other reels is created for each spinning reel (Sh4), and the setting is made when the stop preparation is completed (Sh5). As a result, the stop operation can be validated, and then the stop operation becomes valid when a constant-speed rotation of the reel is detected in the processing at the time of passing through the origin of a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected (Sh6). If any stop switch is not detected, a reel rotation error (a certain period or more) is detected. Then, it is determined whether or not an error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 (Sh7). If no reel rotation error has occurred, an insertion error (medal insertion) is further performed. Whether or not a medal insertion was detected during a period other than the permitted period, and whether or not a payout error (medal payout was detected during a period other than the permitted period) It is determined whether or not an error has occurred (Sh8, Sh9), and any error occurs in steps Sh7 to Sh9. If it is not determined, the flow returns to step Sh6.

  Further, when it is determined that an insertion error has occurred in step Sh8, or when a payout error has been determined in step Sh9, an error code indicating the input / discharge error during reel rotation is set in the register (Sh10). ), The process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. 28 (Sh11). When the error is released, the process returns to the step of Sh6 again.

  If it is determined in step Sh7 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Sh12), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 28 (Sh13). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the step of Sh3 again, and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in step Sh6, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch is calculated. After acquiring and setting the work corresponding to the stop reel (Sh14), the process waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Sh15).

  When the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop operation stops, it is determined whether or not all the reels have stopped (Sh16). If all the reels have not stopped, the process returns to the step of Sh4, and all the reels are If it has stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the reel rotation processing, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected is continued until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation is temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning determination process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd4.

  The winning determination process in this embodiment is mainly composed of three processes. The first process is a process of setting a winning symbol flag based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R derived and displayed in the game. The second process is a process of determining an abnormal winning based on the winning flag and the winning symbol flag. The third process is a process at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag.

  The step of Sj1 is a process of setting a winning symbol flag based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R derived and displayed in the game.

  The CPU 41a first performs a winning symbol determination process (Sj1), and proceeds to step Sj2. In the winning symbol determination process, the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the B register, and the lower eight bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register. The E register stores the number of payout medals.

  As described above, in step Sj1, the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the B register, and the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register.

  The subsequent steps Sj2 to Sj10 and Sj17 are processes for determining an abnormal winning based on the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag.

  In step Sj2, the value of the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) (winning flag) is stored in the HL register, and in step Sj3, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag as the value of the L register are stored in the A register. In step Sj4, all bits of the A register are inverted. That is, each bit is inverted to 1 if it is 0, and is converted to 0 if it is 1, and converted to an abnormal winning determination flag, and the process proceeds to step Sj5.

  In the step of Sj5, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the C register and the logical product (AND) of the value of the A register are calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj6. If the A register is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj17, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step Sj7.

  In step Sj7, the upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag, which is the value of the H register, are stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to step Sj8 to invert all the bits in the A register. That is, each bit is inverted to 1 if it is 0, and is converted to 0 if it is 1 and converted into an abnormal winning determination flag, and the process proceeds to step Sj9.

  In the step of Sj9, the logical product (AND) of the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the B register and the value of the A register is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj10. If the A register is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj17, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step Sj11.

  The step of Sj17 is a jump destination when it is determined in the steps of Sj6 and Sj10 that the A register is not 0, that is, when a prize other than the prize allowed in the game is won, and indicates an abnormal prize error. The error code is set in the register, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  As described above, the abnormal winning is determined based on the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag by the steps Sj2 to Sj10 and Sj17.

  The subsequent steps Sj11 to Sj18 (excluding Sj17) are processes at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag.

  In the step of Sj11, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj12, and the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the B register and the A register The logical sum (OR) of the values is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to step Sj13.

  In step Sj13, it is determined whether the A register is 0. If it is 0, that is, if no winning combination has been won, the process is terminated. If the winning combination is won, the process proceeds to step Sj14.

  In step Sj14, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the C register is inspected for the bit (sixth bit) corresponding to replay, and when the value is 0, that is, other than replay When the winning combination is won, 1 is set to the zero flag, and when the value is 1, that is, when the replay is won, 0 is set to the zero flag. The process proceeds to step Sj15 to determine whether the zero flag is 1. If it is 1, the process jumps to step Sj18, and if not, the process proceeds to step Sj16.

  In step Sj16, a process when a replay is won, such as setting a flag during replay game indicating a replay game, is performed, and the process ends.

  The step of Sj18 is a jump destination when it is confirmed in the step of Sj15 that a winning combination other than the replay has been won, and a process at the time of winning that is performed when a winning combination other than the replay such as calculation of the number of payouts is performed. Then, the process ends.

  As described above, according to the steps Sj2 to Sj10 and Sj17, the process at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag is performed.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sj18.

  In the winning process, first, with reference to the combination table shown in FIG. 5, the game state (state number) of the game and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the combination indicated by the winning symbol flag are set (Sj21). Proceed to step.

  In step Sj22, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If neither the big bonus (1) nor the big bonus (2) has been won. , Go to step Sj25. If the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) has been won, the big bonus medium flag indicating that the big bonus is being set is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) ( In step Sj23), the process proceeds to step Sj24, where the value of the big bonus payout counter in which the total payout of medals in the big bonus is stored in the RAM 41c is initialized (set to 0) (Sj24), and the process proceeds to step Sj25.

  In step Sj25, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If the regular bonus is not won in step Sj25, the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If a regular bonus has been won in step Sj25, a regular bonus medium flag indicating that the regular bonus is in effect is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) (Sj26), and the regular bonus is set. After the value of the game number counter and the value of the regular bonus winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored are initialized (Sj27), the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  42 and 43 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the game end process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd6.

  In the game end process, first, it is determined whether or not RT is in progress based on whether or not the RT flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk1), and if not RT, the process proceeds to step Sk5. If RT is in progress in the step of Sk1, 1 is subtracted from the value of the RT game number counter assigned to the RAM 41c in order to store the remaining number of RT games (Sk2), and the remaining RT game number is 0, that is, the RT game. It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter is 0 (Sk3). If the number of remaining RT games is not 0 in the step of Sk3, the process proceeds to the step of Sk5. If the number of remaining RT games is 0, the RT flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk4), and the step of Sk5 is performed. Proceed to

  In the step of Sk5, it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state. In the step of Sk5, it is determined that the normal gaming state is set when none of the RT flag, the big bonus flag, and the regular bonus flag are set in the RAM 41c. If it is not the normal gaming state in the step of Sk5, the process proceeds to the step of Sk9, and if it is the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to the step of Sk6, and it is determined whether or not the chance eye is stopped as a display result of the game.

  If the chance is not stopped in step Sk6, the process proceeds to step Sk9. If the chance is stopped, the RT flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk7), and the RT game number counter is set to 2 (Sk8). ), Go to step Sk9.

  In step Sk9, it is determined whether a regular bonus is in progress. In step Sk9, when the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the RB signal is ON, it is determined that the regular bonus is being performed.

  If the regular bonus is not in effect at step Sk9, the process proceeds to step Sk13. If the regular bonus is in the step of Sk9, the value of the regular bonus game number counter is decremented by 1, and if a win has occurred, the value of the regular bonus mid-winning counter is incremented by 1 (Sk10), and the regular bonus end condition Is determined, that is, whether the value of the regular bonus game number counter is 0 or the value of the regular bonus winning counter is 8 (Sk11). If the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied in the step Sk11, the process proceeds to the step Sk13. If the regular bonus end condition is satisfied, the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk12). ), Go to step Sk13.

  In step Sk13, it is determined whether a big bonus is in progress. In step Sk13, when the big bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the BB signal is ON, it is determined that the big bonus is being used.

  If the big bonus is not in the step of Sk13, the process proceeds to the step of Sk20. If the big bonus is in effect, the payout number of medals for the game is added to the value of the big bonus medium payout counter (Sk14). Is determined, that is, whether or not the value of the big bonus medium payout counter exceeds 465 (Sk15). If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the step of Sk15, the process proceeds to the step of Sk17. If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the big bonus medium flag and the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c are set. Clear (Sk16) and proceed to Step Sk20.

  In step Sk17, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is not set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the big bonus is in effect and the regular bonus is not activated. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk17, the process proceeds to the step of Sk20. If the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk17, the regular bonus indicating that the regular bonus is in progress. A regular bonus operation start flag indicating the operation start of the flag and the regular bonus is set in the RAM 41c (Sk18), and the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored are initialized. (Sk19), the process proceeds to step Sk20.

  In step Sk20, it is determined whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the RB signal is not in the ON state in Step Sk20, the process proceeds to Step Sk24. If the RB signal is in the ON state, it is determined whether the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk21). ). When the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk21, that is, when the regular bonus ends and the regular bonus does not resume after that, the process proceeds to the step of Sk23. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk21, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk22). When the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk22, that is, when the regular bonus is reactivated during the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk23, and the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk22. If not, that is, if the regular bonus is not satisfied and the termination condition of the regular bonus is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sk24. In step Sk23, the RB signal is turned off and the process proceeds to step Sk24.

  In the step of Sk24, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus operation start flag is not set in the step of Sk24, the process proceeds to the step of Sk27. If the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk24, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, Then, the regular bonus operation start flag in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk25), and the process waits until the output waiting time of the RB in-progress signal elapses (Sk26), and when the output waiting time elapses, the process proceeds to Step Sk27.

  In the step of Sk27, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk27, the process proceeds to the step of Sk33. If the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk27, whether or not the BB medium signal of the external output signals is ON. Is determined (Sk28). When the BB signal is ON in the step of Sk28, that is, when the big bonus is in progress and the next game is not the start game of the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk33, and the BB is in progress in the step of Sk28. When the signal is not ON, that is, when the big bonus starts from the next game, the BB medium signal of the external output signals is turned ON (Sk29), and the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect is stored in the register. After setting (Sk30) and enabling detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 (Sk31), an effect waiting process for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk30 elapses is performed (Sk32). And after completion | finish of an effect waiting process, it progresses to the step of Sk33.

  In the effect waiting process, as shown in FIG. 44, the effect waiting time set in the register is set in the general-purpose time counter of the RAM 41c (Sm1), and it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sm2). If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Sm4. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 33 is performed (Sm3), and then the process proceeds to step Sm4. . In step Sm3, it is determined whether or not the production waiting time set in the general-purpose time counter has elapsed. If the production waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to step Sm2, and if the production waiting time has elapsed. Then, the production waiting process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  In step Sk33, it is determined whether the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk33, the process proceeds to the step of Sk36. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk33, whether the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. Is determined (Sk34). If the RB signal is ON in the step of Sk34, that is, if the regular bonus is in progress and the next game is not the regular bonus start game, the process proceeds to the step of Sk36, and the RB is in progress in the step of Sk34. If the signal is not in the ON state, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, the RB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk35), and the process proceeds to Step S36.

  In step Sk36, it is determined whether or not the BB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the BB signal is not ON in the step of Sk36, the process proceeds to the step of Sk54. If the BB signal is ON in the step of Sk36, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. Determine (Sk37). When the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk37, that is, when the big bonus is not ended, the process proceeds to the step of Sk54, and when the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk37, that is, the big bonus Is finished, the BB signal in the external output signal is turned off (Sk38), the production waiting time of the ending effect is set in the register (Sk39), and the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is enabled. After (Sk40), an effect waiting process (see FIG. 44) is performed to wait until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk39 elapses (Sk41). After completion of the effect waiting process in the step of Sk41, initialization 2 is performed to initialize the general work in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c (Sk42), and then the process proceeds to the step of Sk43.

  In step Sk43, it is determined whether or not the automatic settlement function is set to be valid. If the automatic settlement function is not set to be valid in step Sk43, the process proceeds to step Sk45. If the automatic settlement function is set to be valid in step Sk43, the settlement process shown in FIG. 33 is performed (Sk44). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk45.

  In step Sk45, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be valid. If the stop function is not set to be effective in the step of Sk45, the process proceeds to step Sk54. If the stop function is set to be enabled in the step of Sk45, a stop code indicating the stop state is set in the register. Then, the stop code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sk47). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (S48). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is further detected. If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected (S49), it is further determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sk50), and if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected. Return to the step of Sk48. If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sk48, or if the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step of Sk49, the operation proceeds to the step of Sk52, and the operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed in the step of Sk50. If detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 33 is performed (Sk51), and the process returns to the step of Sk46.

  In step Sk52, the stop code stored in the register is cleared. And the display state of the game auxiliary | assistant display 12 is cleared (Sk53), and it progresses to the step of Sk54.

  In step Sk54, after initialization 4 is performed to initialize the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c, the game end process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the process at the end of the game, it is determined for each game whether or not the regular bonus is not activated during the big bonus. If the regular bonus is not activated during the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. It is supposed to let you.

  Also, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied. If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination, the regular bonus is It is determined whether or not the bonus is inactive. If the bonus is inactive, the regular bonus is activated.

  Further, when operating the regular bonus, the RB in-signal indicating that the regular bonus is in progress is waited until the output waiting time of the RB signal has elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed, Even if the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops, and when the output waiting time elapses in this state, the RB is started again. The signal output is resumed.

  In addition, during the period until the production waiting time of the BB winning effect and the ending effect elapses, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. Control will be performed. Further, even in the stopped state, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated, and even when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, the credit settlement control is performed.

  45 and 46 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, interrupting the start process or the game process at intervals of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interrupt process (main), interrupts are first prohibited (Sn1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sn2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sn3). In the step of Sn3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sn4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sn8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sn23 described later is executed (Sn5).

  Next, referring to the branch counter value, it is determined whether it is 1 or not, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Sn6). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, if it is timer interrupt 1, then the reel motor Reel start processing (Sn7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sn8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, the motor phase signal standby process (Sn9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a predetermined time has been sequentially executed, and then the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20). The interrupt prohibited in the step is permitted (Sn21), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  Further, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sn6, LED dynamic display processing (Sn10) for dynamically lighting various indicators, control signal output processing for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to an output port, etc. (Sn11), random number update processing for updating various software random numbers (Sn12), time counter update processing for updating various time counters (Sn13), and command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After the processing (Sn14) and the external output signal update processing (Sn15) for updating the external output signal are sequentially executed, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupt prohibited in the Sn1 step is permitted. (Sn21) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 is found in the step of Sn4, it is further determined by referring to the branch counter value whether it is 3 or not, that is, the timer interrupt 4 (Sn16). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Sn17) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing through the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (reel reference) (Passing position) is detected, the occurrence of a reel rotation error is detected, whether stop preparation is completed (stop preparation completion code is set), stop preparation is complete, and If it is rotating at high speed, the process at the time of passing through the origin (Sn18) that validates the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel, and these various scans based on the detection signals of various switches. After sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Sn19) for determining whether or not the switch satisfies the detection condition, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step Is permitted (Sn21) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 in the step of Sn16, the stop stored in the work on the stop reel is stored when the stop operation position is stored in the work on the stop reel with the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. The stop position is determined from the operation position, the stop switch process (Sn22) for calculating how many steps should be stopped, the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process is counted, and when it is time to stop A stop process (Sn23) for starting braking by two-phase excitation, and a final stop process (Sn24) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start of braking in the stop process are sequentially executed, and then retracted to the stack area in Sn2. Restore the register (Sn20), enable the interrupt that was prohibited in the Sn1 step (Sn21), Back sense.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop switch process executed in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above by the CPU 41a.

  In the stop switch process, first, for all reels in the order of left, middle, and right, whether or not a stop operation position is set for the work on the corresponding reel, that is, a stop operation has been detected or stopped by automatic stop. Is determined (Sp1, Sp2). If no stop operation has been detected for all reels, or if no stop has been instructed, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If a stop operation of any of the reels is detected in the step of Sp1, the process proceeds to the step of Sp3, the stop control table corresponding to the reel is referred, and the work corresponding to the stop reel is set. From the region number including the number of steps of the stop operation position, the region number serving as the stop position is specified, and the process proceeds to step Sp4.

  In the step of Sp4, the number of steps required from the current reel reference position to the stop position specified in the step of Sp3 is calculated, and after setting the calculated number of steps, the stop switch process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart of 46.

  FIG. 48 shows the control contents of the interruption interrupt process executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interruption 2, that is, when the voltage drop signal from the interruption detection circuit 48 is input, and interrupting the execution process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows.

  In the power interruption interruption process, first, interruption is prohibited (Sq1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing. Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sq2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not inputted, the register saved in the stack area in Sq2 is restored (Sq4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sq1 is permitted (Sq5), and the processing before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sq3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sq6), and all output ports are initialized (Sq7). . Next, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sq8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sq9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq10, where Sq10 is the same processing as Sq3), the processing enters a loop processing in which no processing is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described below based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the sub-control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs a startup process (sub) shown in FIG.

  In the startup process (sub), the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Ss1), and then access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Ss2). Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Ss3), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Ss4).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step Ss4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, and the process proceeds to the step Ss5. The production state before power interruption is restored. In step Ss5, it is determined whether or not the BB winning effect or the ending effect has been executed before the power interruption. If the BB winning effect or the ending effect has been executed, the BB winning effect or the ending effect is executed. Has reached the final stage (Ss6). If the final stage has been reached, a final-stage control pattern is set (Ss7), and then the liquid crystal display is set according to the set control pattern. The effect control process for controlling the various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed (Ss9), the interruption is permitted (Ss10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the BB winning effect or ending effect has not been executed before the power interruption in step Ss5, or if the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage in step Ss6, After setting the last control pattern executed before disconnection (Ss8), the control of various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is performed according to the set control pattern. The effect control process to be performed is executed (Ss9), the interruption is permitted (Ss10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the RAM parity is not 0 in step Ss4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. After the RAM 91c is initialized (Ss11), the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Ss12). In accordance with the set control pattern, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed (Ss9), and interruption is permitted (Ss10). ), Shift to loop processing.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (sub) executed by the CPU 91a at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), first, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the buffer (St1). If no command is stored in the buffer, the process proceeds to step St7. If a command is stored in the buffer, the command is acquired from the buffer (St2), and the process proceeds to step St3.

  In the step of St3, the continuous effect process for executing the continuous effect is executed according to the received command, and the process proceeds to the step of St4.

  In the step of St4, when the received command is an internal winning command, it is determined whether or not an effect pattern for continuous effect is already set in the RAM 91c. If the effect pattern for continuous effect is not set, the ROM 91b is determined. An effect pattern is selected by referring to the effect table stored in the table, selecting an effect pattern at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and setting the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. The selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step St5.

  In step St5, processing corresponding to the received command is performed, and the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, and the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control registered corresponding to the received command are stored. A control pattern setting process for reading the pattern and setting it in the RAM 91c is executed, and the process proceeds to step St6.

  In the step of St6, in accordance with the control pattern set in the step of St5, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed. Proceed to step.

  In the step of St7, a promotion notification process for performing the promotion notification is executed, and the process proceeds to the step of St8.

  In step St8, after updating the values of various counters such as the random number counter in the RAM 91c, the process proceeds to step St9, where it is confirmed whether the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of startup is normal. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0, so that the timer interrupt process (sub) is completed.

  That is, the CPU 91a does not set the RAM parity adjustment data when the power interruption is detected like the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, but the RAM parity adjustment data for each timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed. Even if the power is cut off, it is possible to determine whether or not the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of recovery.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the continuous effect process executed by the CPU 91a in the step of St3.

  In the continuous effect process, first, it is determined what type of command triggered the process (Su1).

  If the command type is a BET command, a BET process described in detail later is performed (Su2), the continuous effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the command type is an internal winning command, a start process, which will be described later in detail, is performed (Su3), the continuous effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the command type is a reel rotation start command, the information regarding the stop symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stored in the RAM 91c in the previous game is cleared (Su4), the continuous effect process is terminated, and FIG. Return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the command type is a reel stop command, a reel stop process described in detail later is performed (Su5), the continuous effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the type of command is a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the winning determination command indicates that any bonus has been won (Su6), indicating that any bonus has been won. If not, the continuous effect process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the winning determination command indicates that one of the bonuses has been won, the value of the continuous counter indicating the number of remaining games of the continuous effect set in the RAM 91c is 0, and the additional effect is executed. It is determined whether the additional flag shown is not set, that is, the state where the continuous effect is not executed at the present time and the additional effect is not performed in the next game (Su7). If the value of the counter is 0 and no additional flag is set, the continuous effect process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  Further, if the continuous counter is not 0 in the step of Su7, or if the additional flag is set, the continuous production being executed is ended (Su8), and the value of the continuous counter is cleared (Su9). Then, the continuous effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the command type is a gaming state command, the RAM 91c is provided with the gaming state (that is, the gaming state applied in the current game) saved in the gaming state saving area of the latest game in the previous game. The game state indicated by the game state command (that is, the game state applied in the next game) is stored in the game state storage area of the latest game provided in the RAM 91c. (Su10), the continuous effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the command type is another command, the continuous effect process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  Next, Su2 BET processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the BET processing, first, it is determined whether or not a confirmation notification flag that is set when notification of determination of bonus winning is notified to the RAM 91c (Sv1). If the confirmation notification flag is set, when all rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped in the game before the previous time, the confirmation of the bonus winning is notified by the continuous effect or the additional effect. .

  In this case, a random number for type notification lottery is extracted by the software random number function, and a type notification lottery for determining whether or not to notify the type of bonus that is won by the extracted random number is performed (Sv2). Then, it is determined whether or not notification of the bonus type is determined in this type notification lottery (Sv3). If it is determined not to notify the bonus type, the process proceeds to Sv5.

  When it is determined that the type of bonus is to be notified, the player is selected by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with the winning status stored in the RAM 91c in the process (described later) of step Sw1 of the previous game. The type of bonus (regular bonus, big bonus (1), big bonus (2)) is notified (Sv4). Then, the process proceeds to Sv5. In Sv5, the fixed notification flag set in the RAM 91c is erased. Then, the BET processing is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the confirmation notification flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 91c is 0 (Sv6). If the value of the continuous counter is not 0, the continuous effect has already been executed, so the BET processing is terminated as it is, and the flow returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the value of the continuous counter is 0, it is further determined whether or not an additional flag is set in the RAM 91c (Sv7).

  If the additional flag is not set, it is determined based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the previous game stored in the RAM 91c whether or not a chance is derived in the previous game (Sv8). ). If no chance is derived in the previous game, the BET processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the chance is derived in the previous game, it is determined whether or not any bonus has been won according to the winning situation stored in the RAM 91c in the process of step Sw1 (described later) of the previous game (step Sv9). .

  If one of the bonuses is won, a random number for selecting a continuous effect pattern is extracted by the software random number function, and the winning effect table in the continuous effect selection table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to according to the extracted random number value. Then, select the pattern of continuous production that will start from now. The continuous effect pattern selected here is stored in the RAM 91c (Sv10). Then, the process proceeds to step Sv12.

  If none of the bonuses are won, a random number for selecting a continuous effect pattern is extracted by the software random number function, and the non-winning time table in the continuous effect selection table stored in the ROM 91b is referred according to the extracted random number value. Then, the pattern of the continuous production starting from now is selected. The continuous effect pattern selected here is stored in the RAM 91c (Sv11). Then, the process proceeds to step Sv12.

  In Sv12, a value corresponding to the effect pattern selected in Sv10 or Sv11 is set as an initial value in the continuous counter of the RAM 91c. Furthermore, the start effect is performed by displaying a predetermined image indicating the start of the continuous effect on the liquid crystal display 51 (Sv13). Then, the BET processing is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the continuous counter is not 0 in Sv6, the BET processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Further, if the additional flag is set in step Sv7, an additional effect is executed. Here, the resumption effect is performed by displaying a predetermined image indicating the start of the additional effect (the resumption of the continuous effect once ended) (Sv14). Then, the BET processing is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, Su3 start-up processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, in the starting process, the winning situation (that is, the winning flag setting situation in the current game) indicated by the internal winning command that triggered the process is saved in the winning situation saving area of the latest game provided in the RAM 91c. (Sw1).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 91c is 0 (Sw2). If the value of the continuous counter is not 0, the continuous effect has already started or at least the start effect has been performed. In this case, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect pattern stored in the RAM 91c is a pattern selected based on the winning time table, and is a pattern for informing the confirmation of the bonus winning (Sw3). If it is not a pattern notifying that the bonus winning is confirmed, the process proceeds to the process of Sw12 as it is. If it is a pattern for notifying the confirmation of bonus winning, it is further determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is 1 (Sw4). If the value of the continuous counter is not 1, the process proceeds directly to the step of Sw12.

  If the value of the continuous counter is 1, the continuous effect will end in the game, and it is further determined whether any bonus is won based on the winning situation stored in the RAM 91c (Sw5). . If no bonus is won, the process proceeds to the step of Sw12.

  If any bonus has been won, none of the bonuses have been won at the start of the continuous production, but a new bonus has been won during the execution of the continuous production. In this case, a predetermined random number is extracted by the software random number function, and it is determined whether to replace the content of the effect in the final game of the continuous effect according to the value of the random number or to perform the additional effect after the end of the continuous effect A replacement / addition determination lottery is performed (Sw6). As a result of the lottery, it is determined whether replacement of the content of the effect of the final game is determined or execution of the additional effect is determined (Sw7).

  When the replacement of the content of the effect in the final game of the continuous effect is determined, an effect replacement flag is set in the RAM 91c (Sw8). Further, the content of the effect in the final game is replaced according to the pattern of the continuous effect stored in the RAM 91c, and the image according to the effect after the replacement is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the effect in the final game of the continuous effect is started. (Sw9). Then, the start-time process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  On the other hand, when the execution of the additional effect is determined, the additional effect pattern is selected from the continuous effect selection table in accordance with the continuous effect pattern stored in the RAM 91c. The additional effect pattern selected here is also stored in the RAM 91c (Sw10). Further, an additional flag indicating execution of the additional effect is set in the RAM 91c (Sw11). And it progresses to the step of Sw12.

  In Sw12, an image corresponding to the continuous effect pattern stored in the RAM 91c and the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 122 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the effect for the current game in the series of continuous effects is started. . Then, the start-time process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the continuous counter is 0 in Sw2, it is further determined whether or not an additional flag is set in the RAM 91c (Sw13). If the additional flag is not set, the start process is terminated without starting any production here, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the additional flag is set, an image corresponding to the pattern of the additional effect stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to start the additional effect (Sw14). Then, the start-time process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, the Su5 reel stop process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, in the reel stop process, the symbol stopped for the reel indicated by the reel stop command according to the reel stop command triggered by the process is stored in the stop symbol table of the RAM 91c (Sx1).

  Next, with reference to the stop symbol table, it is determined whether or not all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped (Sx2). If at least one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is still rotating, the reel stop process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  When all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 91c is 0 (Sx3). If the value of the continuous counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the replacement flag is set in the RAM 91c because the continuous effect is being executed at this time (Sx4). If the replacement flag is set, an image corresponding to the content of the effect after replacement is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the result of the effect in the final game of the continuous effect (Sx5). Further, the replacement flag set in the RAM 91c is deleted, and the value of the continuous counter is cleared (Sx6). Then, the process proceeds to step Sx15.

  If the replacement flag is not set in Sx4, an image corresponding to the continuous effect pattern and the value of the continuous counter stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and this time of the series of continuous effects is displayed. The result of the effect for the game is notified (Sx7). Further, 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 91c (Sx8). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter has become 0 as a result of the subtraction (Sx9). If the value of the continuous counter is not 0, the reel stop process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the value of the continuous counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect pattern stored in the RAM 91c is a pattern selected based on the winning time table and is a pattern for informing the confirmation of the bonus winning. (Sx10). If it is a pattern for informing confirmation of bonus winning, the process proceeds to step Sx15.

  If it is not a pattern for notifying that the bonus is won, information indicating that the bonus has been lost is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the player (Sx11). Then, the reel stop process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the continuous counter is 0 in Sx3, it is determined whether an additional flag is set in the RAM 91c (Sx12). If the additional flag is not set, the reel stop process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the additional flag is set, the additional effect is being executed at this time, so an image corresponding to the pattern of the additional effect stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the result of the additional effect is displayed. Informs (Sx13). Further, the additional flag in the RAM 91c is cleared (Sx14), and the process proceeds to step Sx15.

  In Sx15, a fixed notification flag is set in the RAM 91c. Further, information indicating that the bonus is won is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the player (Sx16). Then, the reel stop process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  55 and 56 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the control pattern setting process executed by the CPU 91a in the step 5 of the timer interrupt process (sub).

  In the control pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a setting start command (Sy1). If the received command is a setting start command, the setting notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy1), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a setting start command in step Sy1, it is determined whether the received command is an initialization command (Sy3). If the received command is an initialization command, all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized (Sy4), the above-mentioned standby pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy5), the control pattern setting process is terminated, Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an initialization command in step Sy3, it is determined whether the received command is a standby command (Sy6). If the received command is a standby command, the standby pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy7), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step Sy6 that the received command is not a standby command, it is determined whether the received command is a stop command (Sy8). If the received command is a stop command, it is further determined whether or not it is a stop command indicating the start (occurrence) of a stop state (Sy9), and if it is a stop command indicating the start of the stop state. Then, the stop notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy10), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not a stop command indicating the start of the stop state, that is, if it is a stop command indicating the release of the stop state, the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Sy7), and the control pattern setting process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of Sy8, if the received command is not a stop command, it is determined whether or not the received command is an error command (Sy11). If the received command is an error command, it is further determined whether or not it is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state (Sy12). If the received command is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, the currently set control pattern is determined. Are temporarily saved in the stack (Sy13), the error notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy14), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, that is, if it is an error command indicating the release of the error state, the control pattern saved in the stack at the time of occurrence of the error, ie, Sy13 is set (Sy15). Then, the control pattern setting process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step Sy11 that the received command is not an error command, it is determined whether the received command is a payout start command (Sy16). If the received command is a payout start command, the payout pattern is set as a sub-pattern (Sy17), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. The sub-pattern is a control pattern that is set in an area different from the area in which the control pattern of the effect that is being executed is set, and is executed when the effect is executed in parallel with the control pattern of the effect that is being executed. It is a control pattern that is set separately from the control pattern for the production. That is, normally, when a new control pattern is set, the control pattern that was originally set is overwritten, whereas the control pattern is set as a sub-pattern, so that Patterns are set at the same time. For this reason, when the payout pattern is set as the sub-pattern in the step of Sy17, an effect based on the payout pattern is executed concurrently with the effect currently being executed.

  If it is determined in step Sy16 that the received command is not a payout start command, it is determined whether the received command is a payout end command (Sy18). If the received command is a payout end command, the payout pattern set as the sub-pattern is cleared (Sy19), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, in the step of Sy19, only the effect based on the payout pattern that has been executed in parallel ends, and only the effect that was originally executed continues.

  If it is determined in step Sy18 that the received command is not a payout end command, it is determined whether the received command is a winning determination command (Sy20). If the received command is a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning (Sy21). If the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning, the BB winning pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy22), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the winning determination command does not indicate a big bonus, it is further determined whether or not a winning other than the big bonus is indicated (Sy23). If the prize determination command indicates a prize other than the big bonus, it corresponds to the winning prize among the winning patterns for executing the winning effect in which a specific effect is executed when the winning occurs. The winning pattern to be set is set as a control pattern (Sy24), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If no win other than the big bonus is shown in the Sy23 step, the process proceeds to the Sy29 step.

  If the command received in step Sy20 is not a winning determination command, it is determined whether the received command is a gaming state command (Sy25). If the received command is not a gaming state command, the process proceeds to step Sy29. If the received command is a gaming state command, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is set in the RAM 91c (Sy26), and based on the set gaming state. It is then determined whether or not the game is a game for which a big bonus end condition is satisfied (Sy27). If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the ending pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy28), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the game is not a game for which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied in step Sy27, the process proceeds to step Sy29.

  In step Sy29, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the received command are read and set, and the control pattern setting process is performed. To return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 57 to 59 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the promotion notification process executed in step St7 of the timer interrupt process (sub) by the CPU 91a.

  In the promotion notification process, it is first determined whether or not at least one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotating based on a setting state of a reel changing flag described later (Sr1). If none of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is rotating, that is, if all the reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not a new internal winning command has been acquired (Sr2). If it is determined that the internal winning command is newly acquired, it is determined whether or not the game is in bonus from the gaming state set based on the last received gaming state command (Sr3). . If the bonus is not in effect, based on the notification pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 15, a notification pattern lottery for determining a notification pattern of promotion notification that can be performed in the game is executed (Sr4). The notification pattern won in the lottery is set as a notification pattern for promotion notification that can be implemented in the game (Sr5), and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If it is determined in step Sr3 that the bonus is being performed, the notification pattern 1 is set as a notification pattern that can be executed in the game without performing the notification pattern lottery (Sr6), and the flowchart shown in FIG. Return.

  If it is determined in step Sr2 that an internal winning command has not been newly acquired, it is determined whether a new reel rotation start command has been acquired (Sr7), and a new reel rotation start command has been acquired. If so, after setting the first value (= 60 seconds) as the counter value of the notification counter (Sr8), the reel changing flag is set (Sr9), and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If at least one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotating in the step of Sr1, it is determined whether or not the promotion notification is being executed based on the setting state of a notification flag that will be described later (Sr10). If the promotion notification is not being executed, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the notification counter is 0 (Sr19). If the counter value is 0, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start to rotate. 60 seconds have passed since the last time, or 60 seconds or 30 seconds have passed since the last stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R was effectively operated, and it is determined whether or not the game is a bonus game (Sr27).

  If the promotion notification is being executed in step Sr10, the process proceeds to step Sr11 to determine whether a new reel stop command has been acquired (Sr11). If a new reel stop command has been acquired, the set notification flag is cleared (Sr12), and it is determined whether or not the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R has been stopped (Sr14). . If the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is not stopped, a notification flag indicating that the promotion notification is executed in the game is set (Sr15), and the second counter value of the notification counter is set. After setting the value (= 30 seconds) (Sr16), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In step Sr14, if all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped rotating, the reel changing flag is cleared (Sr17), and if the informed flag is set, it is cleared. After (Sr18), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the counter value of the notification counter is not 0 in step Sr19, the process proceeds to step Sr20 to determine whether a new reel stop command has been acquired (Sr20), and a new reel stop command is acquired. If so, it is determined whether or not the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R has stopped at that time (Sr21). If the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has not stopped, it is determined whether or not the informed flag is set (Sr22). If the informed flag is set, the notification counter is set. After setting the second value (= 30 seconds) as the counter value (Sr23), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the notification flag is not set, the first value (= 60 seconds) is set as the counter value of the notification counter (Sr24), and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In step Sr21, if the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the reel changing flag is cleared (Sr25), and if the informed flag is set, it is cleared. After (Sr26), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  Next, in step Sr27, if the game is not a bonus game, it is determined whether or not the notification pattern 1 is set as the notification pattern (Sr31). If the notification pattern 1 is set, the notification flag is set (Sr32), the notification pattern 1 is set (Sr33), and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In step Sr27, if the game is a bonus game, the notifying flag is set (Sr28), then the notifying pattern 1 is set, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the notification pattern 1 is set as the notification pattern in the step of Sr31, it is determined whether or not there are reels 2L, 2C, 2R that have already stopped at that time (Sr34). If there are any reels 2L, 2C, 2R that are stopped, it is determined whether or not the display result of the stopped reels is a complete loss (Sr35). The process proceeds to set the notification flag (Sr32), sets the notification pattern 1 (Sr33), and returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, when the complete losing eye is derived and displayed, the promotion notification based on the notification pattern 1 is executed without setting the notification pattern 2 having a high expectation of the bonus set at that time. Thus, it is possible to avoid performing meaningless notification.

  In addition, in the step of Sr34, if there is no reel that has already stopped at that time, and if it is not complete loss in the step of Sr35, a notification flag is set (Sr36), and the notification pattern 2 is set. After (Sr37), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the stop position (display result) is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (area assigned to the number of steps from the reel reference position). When all reels are rotating among a plurality of stop control tables, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the reels are selected according to the selected stop control table. If any reel is already stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel A control table is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When all of the reel stop statuses (and the stop positions (display results) of the stopped reels) are the same, the reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Therefore, as in the prior art, one stop control table is selected from a plurality of stop control tables for one internal winning state by a lottery different from the internal lottery (for example, a reel control sorting lottery). There is no need to make a selection, and the control for stopping the reel does not become complicated.

  Also, in this embodiment, at the start of reel rotation, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected for all reels, and the selected stop control table is selected. Each time the reels are controlled to stop, each time the reels stop, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stopped position of the stopped reels, that is, any one of the reels is stopped. The stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the stop positions of the stopped reels in the stopped state and the combination of the stop positions of the two stopped reels in the state where any two reels are stopped is selected and selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table. For example, any one reel When the reel is rotating, it selects a stop control table that is uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel, and the selected stop control table. And when any of the reels is stopped (when two reels are stopped), a new stop control table is not selected and all reels are rotating. You may make it perform stop control of the remaining reels according to the stop control table selected when any one reel stopped.

  In addition, when any one of the reels is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reels, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop position of the stopped reels. Select and perform reel stop control according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop position of the last stopped reel may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any reel is already stopped, it is uniquely determined with respect to the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stopped position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table provided, but when any reel is already stopped, the internal winning state, the reel stop status and the stop for each game state The reel stop control may be performed in accordance with a stop control table uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the already-reel, and in this way, the gaming state and the internal winning state are the same, Even if the stop position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same, if the stop operation position of the stopped reel is different, the Because there is a stop control table is applied, it can display the results of the reel it more versatile.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When one of the reels further stops (when two reels stop), the stop control table is not newly selected and all The remaining reels may be controlled to stop according to the stop control table selected when any one of the reels stops while the other reels are rotating.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first It is also possible to select a stop control table that is uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the reel that has stopped last or the reel that has stopped last, and to perform stop control of the reel according to the selected stop control table.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any two reels are stopped, the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is uniquely determined for the spinning reel. The selected stop control table is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. For example, when any two reels are stopped, A stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each of the states, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, and the stop operation position of the remaining reels of the stopped reels The reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, for the spinning reel, an internal winning state for each gaming state and a stop control table uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel are selected. Then, when any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, the remaining reels of the stopped reels A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop operation position may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in these cases, the stop operation position of the reel that has been stopped is determined in an area in which the 1/2 symbol fluctuates, that is, in a unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates, and is unique to the stop operation position. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table that is defined in a specific manner, that is, different stop control tables can be selected for different number of steps within a range where one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if the stop position of the stopped reel is the same, and the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, it is applied to other reels. Since the stop control table can be changed, the display results of each reel can be further diversified.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the stop control uniquely determined for the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. In the reel stop control according to the table, for example, in the case of not winning any combination in the normal gaming state (losing), within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined in a specific reel. When the stop operation is performed, the same display result is derived. However, only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the other reels As the stop control table, a stop control table capable of deriving the display result constituting the chance eye was selected, and the same stop position was determined. When a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers, a stop control table capable of deriving a display result that constitutes a chance is selected as a stop control table for another reel. It is preferable.

  For example, in the case of not winning any combination in the normal gaming state (losing), even if the left reel is stopped at any time in the area numbered 5-8, the “watermelon” "Bell Replay" is derived, but at this time, only when a stop operation is performed in the area of area number 7, as the stop control table for the middle reel, the above-described 11 for at least one area number is described. ~ 13th symbol "Cherry Replay Cherry", 21st, 1st, 2nd symbol "Cherry Bell Cherry" stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined, that is, the display constituting the chance eye When a stop control table from which a result can be derived is selected and a stop operation is performed in the areas of area numbers 5, 6, and 8, any area number is set as the stop control table for the middle reel. The stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which the “cherry replay cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols and the “cherry bell cherry” of the 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols are specified is not defined. In other words, a stop control table that cannot derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye may be selected. As a result, even if the stop position of the reel at the time when the specific reel is stopped is the same, the stop operation position is different so that the chance is finally controlled so that it can be derived, and the control cannot be derived Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display result of the reel from becoming monotonous when none of the roles is won in the normal gaming state (losing).

  Furthermore, in this case, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state, among the area numbers for which the same stop position is determined, no combination is won in the normal gaming state. For many area numbers, it is preferable to select a stop control table capable of deriving a display result that constitutes a chance as a stop control table for other reels. In the case where any bonus is won in the game, the chances are derived at a higher rate than in the case where none of the roles are won in the normal gaming state. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the stop control uniquely determined for the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. In the reel stop control according to the table, each time the reel stops, the reel to be stopped is either the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, the corresponding It is preferable that a reel stop command capable of specifying the area number of the stop position of the reel to be transmitted is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In this way, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 can detect when the reel is stopped. In addition, it is possible to perform different effects depending on not only the stop position of the reel but also the stop operation position.

  In particular, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the same display is displayed when a stop operation is performed within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined on a specific reel. The result is derived, but only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the display that configures the chance as the stop control table of the other reels Select a stop control table that can derive the result, and stop other reels when a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is defined As a control table, a stop control table capable of deriving a display result constituting an opportunity is selected, and any bonus is won in the normal gaming state. As a stop control table for other reels, the area numbers for which the same stop position is determined are larger than those in the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state. When a stop control table capable of deriving a display result constituting a chance eye is selected, when the stop operation position satisfies the derivation condition of the chance eye when the reel stop command is received, that is, the chance eye When the stop control table from which the display result to be configured can be derived is a selected stop operation position, the ratio is higher than when other stop operation positions that do not satisfy the chance derivation condition but have the same stop position are used. Therefore, a special performance (for example, unusual stop sound, etc.) that informs the possibility of winning any special role may be performed. By doing so, the special effect is performed when the specific reel is stopped, which increases the possibility that the chance chance is finally derived as compared to the case where the special effect is not performed when the specific reel is stopped, As the special performance is performed, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the derivation of the chance and the winning of the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of frames to be drawn (stop position when a stop operation is detected in the range) for each range of a plurality of consecutive steps (in this embodiment, 4 steps each having one symbol change). Since the reel stop control is performed using the uniquely determined stop control table, the capacity of the table creation data for creating the stop control table can be greatly reduced.

  In this embodiment, a stop control table is used in which the number of frames to be drawn is uniquely determined for each unit of the area in which one symbol varies. For example, an area in which the 1/2 symbol varies That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined for each unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which different stop positions are set for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if it is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, the display result derived by the different timing of the stop operation can be changed, so that it is more diverse depending on the timing of the stop operation. The display result of the reel can be derived in such a manner.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery, or when only one (1) is won, area numbers 4 to 8 or area numbers 10 to 10 shown in FIG. When a stop operation is made at any timing within the 14 range, that is, when the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of 1 (1) cannot be pulled in even within a maximum of 4 frames, that is, 1 ( 1) If you cannot win a prize, if you do not win any role by internal lottery (losing), it will not be derived.・ "Watermelon Bell", 8-10 symbols "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" can be derived, if any bonus is won by internal lottery, or only one (2) In the case of selection, the timing of any of the area numbers 6 to 8 or the area numbers 17 to 21 shown in FIG. When a stop operation is made at a timing that cannot be drawn even within the range of 4 frames, that is, when it is not possible to win one (2), and when any of the roles is not won by internal lottery (losing) It is possible to derive the “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols that will not be derived. By deriving the display results constituting these chance eyes, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the special role is won.

  Also, in this embodiment, if any bonus is won by internal lottery and any other combination is not won, or if only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and When only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12, 13 “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” or “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as display results, but if no part is won (losing), the area number 6 Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2 to 4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8 to 10 are displayed as display results. Not derived Therefore, when a bonus is won by an internal lottery, or only one (1) is won and a stop operation is performed at a timing when one (1) cannot be won, or one (2) When a stop operation is performed at a timing when only one of them is won and one (1) cannot be won, the stop operation is performed at the same timing in a state where no winning combination is won by internal lottery. However, since it is possible to derive the display result that constitutes the chance eye that is not derived, the display result that constitutes the chance eye is derived, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus. be able to.

  In addition, if any combination is not won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal time, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, and any bonus by internal lottery Except for the case where is won, it is possible to derive chance chances by winning one (1) or one (2). For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel has already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even if reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In this embodiment, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), a display result constituting a chance eye may be derived no matter what timing the stop operation is detected. No stop control table is created. For example, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), whether any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, 1 The “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) are not derived on any winning line for the stop operation position (area number) which is smaller than when only one (1) is won. Whether a display result that constitutes a chance eye derived when a stop operation is performed at the timing is specified and whether any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, 1 (2) The timing when the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of (2) are not derived on any winning line with respect to a smaller stop operation position (area number) than when only (2) is won The stop control table for specifying the display result that constitutes the chance to be derived when the stop operation is performed may be created as the stop control table for the left reel. As a result, the bonus has been won by internal lottery, or one (1) or one (2) has been won, and at the timing when the winning one (1) or one (2) cannot be won. When a stop operation is performed, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye at a higher rate than when no role is won by internal lottery, so the chance eye is derived Thereby, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel In the state that is still rotating, regardless of the display result of the reels that have already stopped, the display result that constitutes the chance eye that is not derived if any role is not won (losing) When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the left reel is still rotating. "Blue 7" composing one ball combination on the winning line of "No. 7", or "Blue 7" composing one (1) combination on the winning line of the left reel Although the handle is stopped, the stop operation was performed within the range where the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination cannot be pulled in on the winning line where “Blue 7” is stopped on the left reel. Or when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating, and 1 on the winning line of the left reel The “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the two sheets (2) is not stopped, or the “Red 7” symbol constituting the one (2) combination is stopped on the winning line of the left reel. When the stop operation is performed within a range where the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of one (2) on the winning line where “Red 7” is stopped on the left reel cannot be drawn, If you are not elected (lost) Rukoto-free, and can be led to the center reel display results that make up the chance eyes.

  In addition, if any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. Regardless of the display result of a reel that has already stopped in the state, if the winning combination has not been won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye is derived to the right reel. When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, so that it is on the winning line of the left reel. If the "Blue 7" symbol that constitutes the combination of one (1) has not stopped, or at least the middle reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, If the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination on the reel winning line is not stopped, and only one (2) is won in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel If the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of two (1) on the winning line of the left reel has not stopped, and at least the middle reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating Is already stopped, and the right reel is still rotating, and the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes one (2) combination on the winning line of the middle reel has not stopped. If the winning combination is not won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye can be derived to the right reel without being derived.

  That is, when one of the bonuses is won, or when one (1) or one (2) is won and one of the reels is stopped and one (1) or one It is possible to win one (1) or one (2) when one (1) or one (2) cannot be won, or when any one reel is stopped. When one piece (1) or one piece (2) could not be won because the stop operation was performed at a timing when the combination of one piece (1) or one piece (2) could not be derived, Since it is possible to derive the display results that make up the chance eyes that are not derived if they are not selected (losing), the display results that make up these chance eyes are derived. The role won It is possible to increase the player's expectation for Rukoto.

  In addition, only one (1) or one (2) is won, and one of the winning lines on the left reel winning line is a symbol that constitutes a combination of one (1) or one (2). Even if it is not stopped up, one stop (1) or one (1) on the winning line of the left reel because the stop operation was performed at a timing other than the timing at which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified. Even if the symbols constituting the combination 2) do not stop on any of the winning lines and the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, the display result constituting the chance eye on the middle reel or the right reel Can be derived and the opportunity for deriving the display result constituting the chance eye is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the bonus can be effectively enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery, or when only one (1) or one (2) is won, one of the reels is stopped. In the case where one (1) or one (2) could not be won already, a stop operation is performed at the timing of a specific area number, so that any combination is won by internal lottery. Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance eye that is not derived even if a stop operation is performed at the same timing in the absence of the state, by deriving the display result that constitutes the chance eye, It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  In addition, when none of the winning combinations are won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal times, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. In any case, except when one of the bonuses is won by internal lottery, it is possible to derive a chance by winning one (1) or one (2). For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel has already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even if reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In the present embodiment, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the chance of the stop operation is detected at any timing regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. A stop control table is created in which the display result that constitutes the game is not derived. For example, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), at least one reel The number of stop operation positions (area number) is smaller than when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state or only one (1) or one (2) is won. On the other hand, a stop control table in which display results constituting a chance eye are specified may be created as a left reel stop control table. As a result, a bonus has been won by internal lottery, or one (1) or one (2) has been won and at least one reel has been stopped, and already one (1) or one (2) When it is not possible to generate a prize, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye at a higher rate than when no role is won by internal lottery, so the chance eye is derived. By doing so, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, when the display result is derived for the left reel, the chance is not established, but when the display result is derived for any two reels or all reels (all winning combinations are The chance eye is established when the display result is derived to any one of the reels, for example, 8 to the left reel. A display mode that is established only by deriving the 10th symbol “bell / red 7 / bell” may be applied as an opportunity.

  In addition, for one (1) and one (2) that can be used to derive a chance when a prize cannot be won, a maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game is set. This is a prize that involves paying out 3 or less (1) medals, which is the number of medals required to win. Even if it is not, the player will not suffer a major disadvantage, and the winning probability of 1 (1) and 1 (2) will not greatly affect the payout rate of the slot machine 1, For example, it is possible to increase the probability that one (1) and one (2) winnings are permitted to increase the chances of deriving chances, effectively increasing the player's expectation for the bonus. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out with the winning of one (1) and one (2) is one which is necessary for setting the minimum number of bets for one game. Therefore, the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected.

  In this embodiment, one medal is paid out to the player with the winning of one (1) and one (2). The number of medals to be paid out with the occurrence is not limited to one, and it is preferable that the number of medals to be paid out with the occurrence of a specific award that can derive a chance is smaller, but at least for one game If the number of medals required for setting the maximum betable number (3 in this embodiment) (three in this embodiment) is less than or equal to, the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected. Also, for example, when the number of payouts differs depending on whether it stops at a plurality of pay lines like cherry or stops at one pay line, the number of payouts when the combination of combinations stops at multiple pay lines However, if the number of medals is less than the number of medals required to set the maximum bet number that can be set for one game (3 in this embodiment), the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected.

  Also, in this embodiment, when only one (1) or one (2) is won by internal lottery, it stops at a timing when one (1) or one (2) cannot be won. The number of stop operation positions (region numbers) in which the number of drawing frames specifying the display result constituting the chance eye derived when an operation is detected is one (1) or one (2) Since the number of draw-in frames for which the display result for the symbols constituting the combination to stop on any of the winning lines is specified is greater than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) determined, one (1) in the normal gaming state (1 ) Or in the case where only one (2) is won, a display result is derived in which the symbols constituting the combination of one (1) or one (2) stop on one of the winning lines. Higher than 1 (1) The display result constituting the chance chance derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing when one (2) cannot be won is derived, and one (1) is obtained by internal lottery. Or when only one (2) is elected, one symbol (1) rather than the symbols constituting the combination of the one (1) or one (2) being derived on any winning line ) Or one (2) cannot be won, and the display result that constitutes the chance to be derived when the stop operation is detected is more easily derived, so the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus A feeling can be heightened effectively.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the big bonus (2) is won by internal lottery or when one (1) is won, either “blue 7” symbol is drawn in the range of up to 4 frames. If the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 18 among the timings that can be stopped on the winning line of the game, it will not be derived if no winning combination is won. ˜17 symbols “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”, that is, if one (1) combination is not available on the winning line, a display result will be derived that will lead to a chance. When either bonus is won by internal lottery or when one (2) is won, draw “Red 7” symbol within the range of up to 4 frames If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 12 and 13 among the timings at which it can be stopped on the line, it will not be derived if no combination is won. No. 10 symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, that is, if the combination of 1 sheet (2) is not aligned on the winning line, the display result that will lead to the chance eye is derived. The timing at which the symbols constituting one (1) or one (2) combination are derived on any winning line and one (1) or one (2) cannot be won Even if the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected is not derived, it is possible to win one (1) or one (2) of the derived display results. Thailand If the display result which constitutes the chances eyes stop operation in ring is derived even when it is detected, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the bonus generation.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the big bonus (2) is won by internal lottery or only one (1) is won, a stop operation is detected at the timing of area number 18 shown in FIG. In the case where the bonus is selected, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols constituting the chance chance is derived as the display result, and when one of the bonuses is won by the internal lottery or only one (2) If the stop operation is detected at the timing of the range of area numbers 12 and 13 shown in FIG. 10, “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols constituting the chance eye is displayed. Although it is derived as a display result, in the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), even if a stop operation is detected at the timing of area number 18, it is 15-17. The symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” is not derived as a display result, and the stop operation is detected at any timing within the range of the region numbers 12 and 13 and the symbol “Bell / Red” “7 Bell” is not derived as a display result, so a bonus is won by internal lottery, or only one (1) or one (2) is won and one (1) or 1 When a stop operation is performed at a timing that allows winning of the sheet (2), it is derived even if the stop operation is performed at the same timing in a state where no winning combination is won by internal lottery. Since it is possible to derive display results that constitute no chance, symbols constituting one (1) or one (2) combination are derived on any winning line, and one (1) ) Or one 2) Even if the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which it is not possible to win 2), the derived display result is one (1) or one Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing at which (2) can be won, a display result that constitutes a chance to be derived can increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  In this embodiment, since the common “blue 7” symbol is used as the symbol constituting the combination of one (1) and the symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2), The display result constituting the chance eye to be derived is derived even when the stop operation is detected at the timing at which the 17th symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”, that is, one (1) can be won. Thus, if the big bonus (2) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing targeting the “blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of the big bonus (2) on the middle reel and the right reel. It becomes possible to stop the combination of the big bonus (2) on the winning line and win the game. Similarly, since the common “red 7” symbol is used as the symbol constituting the combination of one (2) and the symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1), 8-10. Even if a stop operation is detected at the timing at which the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, that is, one (2) can be won, a display result constituting a chance eye is derived. If the regular bonus or big bonus (1) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing aimed at the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of the regular bonus or big bonus (1) on the middle reel, and the right reel The target is the “BAR” symbol that constitutes the regular bonus combination or the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the big bonus combination. By performing the stop operation at timing, it is possible to prize is stopped in the game a combination of regular bonus or big bonus (1) on the pay line.

  The present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, as a symbol constituting the combination of one (1) and one (2), a symbol different from the symbol constituting the bonus combination is applied. Even in this case, one (1) or one (2) configuration symbol is derived on one of the winning lines, and one (1) or one (2) is won. Even when the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing that cannot be performed, the derived display result is one sheet (1) or one sheet (2). The display result that configures the chance item including the configuration symbol of the symbol, that is, the chance item that is derived even when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (1) or one (2) can be won. Display result If so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  Also in this case, the display result constituting the chance item including one (1) or one (2) constituent symbols includes the symbols constituting the bonus combination, that is, one (1). Alternatively, it is preferable that the display configuration is such that one (2) configuration symbol and the bonus configuration symbol both stop on the winning line, and even in this case, one (1) or one (2) Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing where a winning can be won, a display result that constitutes a chance chance to be derived is derived, so that if the bonus is won, the middle reel and the right reel are also won. The bonus combination selected in the game can be stopped on the winning line to win a prize by performing a stop operation at the timing of the symbols that make up the bonus combination. The ability.

  Also, in this embodiment, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), one (1) or one (2) is won regardless of the timing when the stop operation is detected. Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing that can be performed, a stop control table is created in which a display result that constitutes a chance eye to be derived is not derived. If no combination is won in the state (losing), than if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state or only one (1) or one (2) is won A chance to be derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (1) or one (2) can be won with respect to a small number of stop operation positions (region numbers). May be created a stop control table display result is identified as a stop control table of the left reel. As a result, when a bonus is won by internal lottery, or when one (1) or one (2) is won, one (1) at a higher rate than when no part is won by internal lottery ( 1) or 1 (2) Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance chance to be derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) can be won, 1 (1) Or, when the symbols constituting the combination of one (2) are derived on any winning line and a stop operation is detected at a timing when one (1) or one (2) cannot be won Even when the display result constituting the chance chance to be derived is not derived, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which the derived display result can win one (1) or one (2). Case If the display results that make up the chance eyes are also derived, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the left reel, a display mode (region number 14) in which the 16th “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (1) stops at one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel. -16, 15-17, 16-18) and the display mode (area) in which the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 constituting the combination of one sheet (2) stops at one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel No. 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) are arranged beyond the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames, respectively, and the stop operation position that can aim at the “red 7” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol at the same time Since it does not exist, when one of the symbols constituting the combination of one (1) or the symbol constituting the combination of one (2) is always aimed at stopping the reel, one (1), One of the two (2) can always be awarded Since it becomes impossible to perform a stop operation at a timing at which the other combination can be won, and in this case, a chance is derived, so 1 (1), 1 (2) Even if the reel stop operation is always performed aiming at one of the roles, it is possible to make the chance chance appear appropriately. In this case, the other one of the one (1) and one (2) Since it is impossible to determine whether or not the bonus has been won or whether the bonus has been won, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus by the appearance of the chance.

  In addition, since one (1) and one (2) have the same winning probability and the same number of medals for winning a prize, one combination of one (1) and one (2) Since there is little merit to stop the reel by performing only this, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the willingness to perform the stop operation aiming at one of the one (1), one (2), stop at various positions There is a high possibility that the operation is performed, and the display results can be varied.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the left reel, the 9th “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (2), the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus (1) are the upper and middle stages of the left reel. , The display mode (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stops at one of the lower tiers, the combination of one sheet (1) and the combination of big bonus (2) No. 16 “blue 7 ”The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18) where the symbol stops at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel is arranged in excess of 4 frames, each of which is the maximum drawing range. Since there is no stop operation position that can aim at the “Red 7” symbol and “Blue 7” symbol at the same time, the stop operation is aimed at the “Red 7” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol is derived on the winning line. Can not be made and The “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols constituting the event is derived, and the Big Bonus (1) or the Regular Bonus (1) cannot be awarded in the end. If you didn't win, you won't know if you couldn't win one (1) or you couldn't win the big bonus (2) corresponding to the other "Blue 7" symbol, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols that make up the “Blue 7” symbol, the “Red 7” symbol cannot be derived on the winning line, and constitute the chance eye When the big bonus (2) could not be won, and no other combination was won, the other (2) could not be won. Legion corresponding to “Red 7” symbol Either because the error bonus or big bonus (1) was not able to prize winning is not known, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and the specific symbol constituting the combination of one (1) are respectively configured by the same “blue 7” symbol, The special symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1) and the specific symbol constituting the combination of one (2) are each composed of the same “red 7” symbol. And the specific symbol are composed of different symbols, and at least the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1) or the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) A display mode in which one of the symbols stops on the winning line (a display mode in which the “red 7” symbol or the “blue 7” symbol stops in either the upper, middle, or lower level), The display mode (display mode in which the specific symbol stops at either the upper, middle, or lower level) where the specific symbols that make up the combination (1) or (2) stop on the winning line is the maximum pull-in respectively. The same operation and effect as described above can be obtained as long as the frame is arranged beyond the 4 frames.

  Also, in this embodiment, in the left reel, the “cherry” symbol No. 6 constituting the combination of cherries that pays out more medals than one (1) in the normal gaming state is the upper, middle and lower tiers of the left reel. Display mode (region numbers 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” symbol that composes one (1) is the left reel The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) that stops at any of the upper, middle, and lower levels exceeds the maximum drawing range of 4 frames. There is no stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed simultaneously, and only one of the symbols can be aimed. Further, as described above, in the normal gaming state, when the cherry is won, more medals are paid out than when one (1) wins. No. 6 “Cherry”, which is a combination of cherries, cannot be stopped on the winning line at the timing aimed at the “Cherry” symbol, that is, the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination. It is possible to increase the willingness to perform the stop operation at a timing at which the symbol can be stopped on any winning line.

  In addition, a maximum of 4 frames for the “Cherry” symbol of No. 6 and a stop operation position (area number 6 to 12) where the number of frames to be stopped to be stopped on any winning line is determined, and one (1) is won Stop operation position (area number) where the number of pull-in frames to stop the “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” which sometimes constitute the chance chance 4-8, region numbers 10-14) partially overlap, and when a stop operation is performed at these overlapping stop operation positions (region numbers 6-8, region numbers 10-12), If one (1) is won, the 2-4 symbol “Replay Watermelon Bell” and the 8-10 symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” will stop. Become. For this reason, in accordance with the increased willingness to perform the stop operation at the timing at which the “Cherry” symbol No. 6 constituting the combination of cherries can be stopped on any winning line, one piece (1 ) Can be increased when the display results constituting the chance eyes are derived.

  In this embodiment, the cherry is applied as a special prize winning with a payout of more medals than the one (1) as the specific prize winning. As long as a combination including symbols that cannot be aimed at the same time as the symbols that make up the symbol is established by stopping on the winning line, winning is not achieved only with the left reel like cherry, but two or more It may be established by stopping the corresponding symbol on the reel winning line.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the chance is stopped, that is, when one of the bonuses is won, the display mode is derived at a higher rate than when no bonus is won. As a result of this, the continuous production will be executed, making it easier to understand the start of the continuous production and increasing the player's expectation for winning the bonus at both the chance and the continuous production. .

  In addition, when the chance is stopped, the replay winning probability (not only the winning probability but also the winning probability) increases over two games, and the continuous effect is performed during that time, so the continuous effect is performed. During this time, it becomes difficult to win a bonus, and it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether or not the bonus is won. Therefore, the continuous performance can be completed without making it meaningless. Furthermore, even if the bonuses cannot be aligned during the continuous performance, a replay game that gives a replay and does not require the insertion of medals is given, so even if it is controlled to RT that makes it difficult to win a bonus It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the opportunity is stopped when the chance is stopped, and the continuous production is performed during that time, but the chance is stopped in a state where no bonus is won. In the meantime, the transition to RT may be triggered by the winning of the bonus or the bonus is won, and the continuous production may be performed during that time, and the continuous production starts without stopping the chance eyes. By doing so, since the winning of the bonus is confirmed, it is possible to enhance the interest by continuous production.

  In addition, the continuous performance is performed when any of the bonuses is won or not. In the latter case, the continuous production has contents that have not been won for any bonus, and if any bonus is not newly won by the end of the bonus, the determination of the loss is informed as it is.

  However, a bonus may be newly won in the game after the continuous production in the latter case is started. Even in this case, since the continuous production that has already been started is performed to the end, the control related to the execution of the continuous production is not complicated. However, if only the confirmation of the loss is notified as it is, information different from the winning situation at the end of the continuous performance remains to be shown to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the final game of the continuous production, it is determined whether or not the continuous production being executed is a continuous production started when no bonus is won, and this continuous production starts. It is determined whether or not a bonus has been newly won in the game after being played. Then, if a bonus is newly won in the game after the continuous production has started, the content of the production in the final game of the continuous production may be replaced or the continuous production It is assumed to select whether or not to perform an additional effect after the end.

  When the content of the production in the last game of the continuous production is replaced, the content of the production after the replacement in the final game can be shown and the confirmation of bonus winning can be shown to the player, so the player is distrusted The continuous production can be ended without making it feel. On the other hand, when the execution of the additional effect is selected, the result of the losing is once notified, but the player has won the bonus by the additional effect that is executed immediately after the end of the continuous effect. Therefore, the continuous production once started can be performed to the end without causing the player to feel distrust.

  Regardless of whether the content of the production in the final game of the continuous production is replaced or the additional production is executed following the continuous production, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been newly won in the game after the continuous production is started. Is only required in the final game of the continuous production. In this way, it is determined whether the continuous production being executed is a continuous production that was started when no bonus was won, and a bonus was newly won in the game after the continuous production was started. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the control has been performed, the control load does not become too large.

  Further, even when the replacement of the content of the effect is selected, the content of the effect is replaced only for the effect in the final game of the continuous effect. For this reason, the replacement pattern of the content of the production does not become too complicated, and the control load does not become too large. When the execution of the additional effect is selected, it is only necessary to newly perform the additional effect while keeping the content of the continuous effect as it is. For this reason, an unnecessary control load is not applied to the execution of the continuous performance. Furthermore, since there are both the replacement of the contents of the effects and the execution of the additional effects, the types of effects become abundant and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been newly won only in the final game. For example, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been newly won for each game during the continuous performance. Anyway. In this way, in the case where it is determined whether or not the bonus has been newly won for each game in the continuous performance, and the replacement of the content of the performance is selected, the content of the performance may be replaced from that time. However, when a bonus is newly won, it is preferable to remember that fact and replace the contents of the production only in the final game. In this way, the replacement pattern of the contents of the production becomes too complicated. Therefore, the control load does not become too large. In addition, if the execution of the additional effect is selected in the case of determining whether or not the bonus has been newly won for each game during the continuous effect, the fact is memorized when the bonus is newly selected. What is necessary is just to perform a new additional production, with the content of the continuous production as it is.

  In the continuous performance, when a chance is derived, any performance pattern is selected from a plurality of predetermined patterns. If the execution of the additional effect is selected when the winning of any bonus is determined in the final game of the continuous effect that was started when no bonus has been won, the pattern of the additional effect to be executed is , Selected according to the pattern of the continuous performance that was being executed at that time. As described above, continuous effects (and additional effects) are performed with a plurality of types of patterns, so that a variety of effects can be achieved and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, by selecting the pattern of the additional effect according to the pattern of the continuous effect being executed, the additional effect can be matched with the continuous effect, and the continuous effect and the additional effect can be shown to the player as a series of effects without any sense of incongruity. Will be able to.

  Furthermore, as a pattern of continuous effects, there are a pattern that continues for a period of two games and a pattern that continues for a period of three games. As described above, there are different periods as the period during which the continuous presentation is performed, so that the aspect of the presentation becomes rich and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In this embodiment, the additional effect is performed only for one game. However, a pattern with a different number of continuous games is prepared as in the case of the continuous effect so far, and the period during which the additional effect continues by selecting the pattern is provided. Even when there are different periods during which additional effects are performed in this way, there are many types of effects, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  When the replacement of the content of the effect is selected in the final game of the continuous effect, the content of the effect in the final game after the replacement is also selected according to the pattern of the continuous effect that was being executed at that time. As a result, the contents of the continuous performance can be shown to the player without a sense of incongruity by matching the winning situation in the final game.

  Furthermore, the content of the effect that has been replaced is not included in the pattern of the continuous effect that has not been replaced. The replacement of the production is performed in a rare case where the bonus is won after the continuous production is started, but the result of the exchanged production is shown only in such a rare case. The contents of the production can be given a premier character, and the entertainment of the production can be enhanced. Similarly, the content of the additional effect is not included in the continuous effect pattern. Since the additional production is also performed in a rare case where the bonus is won after the continuous production is started, the additional production is performed only in such a rare case, so that the additional production is premier. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the regular bonus, the combination of the combination and combination to be subjected to the internal lottery is defined as bell, JAC + cherry, JAC + 1 sheet (1), JAC + 1 sheet (2). In a bonus game, when a winning combination with a relatively small number of payouts such as cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2) is won, the number of payouts is greater than that of cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2) JAC with a lot of wins are won at the same time, and JAC is won to win more medals than when 1 Cherry (1), 1 (2) wins. 1) Since 1 (2) is won, the number of medals that can be obtained during the regular bonus will not decrease.

  Also, JAC is only eligible for regular bonuses and is not eligible for other gaming states. JAC can be awarded only for regular bonuses, so that it is a regular bonus or other gaming state. In addition to being clearly distinguishable, it is possible to differentiate between regular bonuses and other gaming states.

  In the present embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding only to the special role, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role The storage address of the corresponding number of decision values is registered, and in the internal lottery, the number of decision values of each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table is added to the internal random number for the internal lottery acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role overflows. In such a case, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and if the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role is judged. And Betsuyaku and the general role is adapted to be elected at the same time. In other words, by making it possible to specify the range of judgment values for each of the general roles and special roles, and the range of determination values for which the general roles and special roles are selected in duplicate, from one role-specific table. , Special role and general role can be elected at the same time. As a result, even if the general role is won as a result of the game, the winning of the special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied, so the player's expectation for winning the special role is maintained even in such a situation Can be made.

  In this embodiment, the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) and the cherry, one (1) or one (2) can be won simultaneously, and the big bonus (1) or big bonus Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2) and Cherry are winning at the same time than the judgment value range where 1 (1) or 1 (2) is won at the same time The big bonus (1) or big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) and the probability of winning one (1) or one (2) at the same time are more than the big bonus (1) or big bonus The probability that (2) and Cherry will win at the same time is higher, so when Cherry wins than when 1 (1) or 1 (2) wins, Since the possibility of winning at the same time as the bonus (1) or big bonus (2) increases, the expectation of winning the special role will vary depending on the type of general role when the general role is won. Can increase interest.

  In this embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding only to the special role, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role Register the storage address of the corresponding number of judgment values, and in the internal lottery, add the number of judgment values for each combination or combination of combinations referred to from the combination table to the random number for internal lottery acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role overflows. In such a case, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and if the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role should be judged. And special And general roles can be elected at the same time, but the role table for general roles where the storage addresses for general roles are registered and the special roles for which the storage addresses for the number of judgment values for special roles are registered In the internal lottery, for the same random number for internal lottery, the lottery of the general role that refers to the role table for the general role and the special role that refers to the role-specific table for the special role In addition to performing the lottery separately, the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the general role table and the determination stored in the address area registered in the special role table By making it possible to specify from the number of values the range of judgment values in which the general role and special role are each won, and the range of judgment values in which the general role and special role are won in duplicate, General roles are elected at the same time Even if such a configuration is used, even if a winning combination for a general role occurs as a result of the game, the winning of a special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied. In this case, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination and combination of combinations registered in the combination table may differ depending on the set value, but regardless of the set value. For the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that have the same winning probability, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, the number of determination values stored at different addresses even if the target combination or combination of the internal lottery is the same and the addresses storing the number of determination values referenced according to the set value are different. May be the same.

  In general, in the development stage, it is assumed that the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of judgment values (that is, the winning probability) according to the setting value (that is, adjusting the winning probability of the internal lottery) for at least some of the roles. Yes. As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set for the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by the simulation is the same regardless of the set value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as that in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the number of judgment values of each combination or combination of combinations referred from the combination table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and depending on whether the result of the addition overflows, Whether or not each winning combination or winning combination is won is determined. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations as it is. It should be noted that when the winning determination table is generated before the actual winning determination is made, the loop processing is required twice, but according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing can be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency of the entire lottery process is high.

  In this embodiment, if the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the symbol to be stopped is selected according to the winning status of the winning combination and the timing of the stop operation, and the display result is displayed on the reel. Derived. In other words, not only the winning status of the winning combination but also the player's technical intervention such as the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R will prevent the winning from occurring due to the chance factor alone. As a result, it is possible to ensure the suppression of the shooting characteristics. In addition, regardless of the time that the player has not operated the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effectively detected, the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected yet. Since the display result is derived to the corresponding reel on the condition that the rotation is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effectively detected, the stop switch 8L, 8C, and 8R is played by the player. The display result is not derived only by the contingency element that the time has passed without being operated, and it is possible to ensure the suppression of the shooting property.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the state where the stop operation is not effectively performed after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has continued for 60 seconds, which is the first notification waiting time, or either If there is a reel that is still rotating after the last reel has stopped, the first notification waiting time is 60 seconds or the second notification that the stop operation is not effectively performed since the last stop of the reel. The presence / absence of the promotion notification is made by executing the promotion notification by displaying a notification screen (see FIG. 14) prompting the reel stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the waiting time is 30 seconds. This makes it easy to determine whether the player has been absent for a long time or not. If at least the notification screen is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, it can be seen that 30 seconds or 60 seconds have passed since the player left the seat.

  Also, in the state where the game sound effect is being produced, the state where the stop operation is not effectively performed after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R has continued for 60 seconds, which is the first notification waiting time, If there is a reel that is still rotating after any one of the reels is stopped, the state where the stop operation is not effectively performed after the last stop of the reel is the first notification waiting time of 60 seconds or the second In the case of promoting notification when the notification waiting time lasts 30 seconds, it is preferable to lower the volume of the game sound effect or to mute at the same time as the promotion notification is started. Even so, it does not bother the surrounding players.

  Further, when an effective stop operation is performed during the execution of the promotion notification, the promotion notification is terminated, and the promotion notification is executed endlessly even though the stop operation is made effective. Can be avoided. In addition, as described above, when the promotion notification is started while the game sound effect is being output and the volume is lowered or the sound is muted, the original volume is restored when an effective stop operation is performed. It is preferable to return it, and by doing in this way, it is possible to avoid the state in which the volume is lowered or the sound muting state continues continually even though the stop operation is made effective.

  In this embodiment, the counter value subtraction (timekeeping) by the notification counter is started when the CPU 91a obtains a reel rotation start command that can specify that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have started rotating. However, for example, the time may be measured from the time when the operation of the start lever 7 is detected, that is, the time when the internal winning command is acquired, or the time when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types (in this embodiment, two types) of notification patterns (notification patterns 1 and 2) are registered in advance as notification patterns (notification modes) of the promotion notification, and the bonus is won. If there is, the notification pattern 2 is selected with a higher probability than when the bonus is not won, and the notification screen based on the notification pattern 2 is displayed. When the notification screen based on the pattern 2 is selected, the player can expect to win a bonus more than when the notification screen based on the notification pattern 1 is displayed. Can be increased.

  In the notification pattern lottery, when the bonus is won, the notification pattern 2 as the second notification mode is selected with a probability of 50%, but when the bonus is won, The notification pattern 2 may be selected with a higher probability than when the bonus is not won. For example, the notification pattern 2 may be selected with a probability of 100% when the bonus flag is won.

  Also, if there is a reel that is still rotating after any of the reels is stopped, if the promotion notification has already been executed in the game, the stop operation becomes effective after the reel has stopped at the end. Since the promotion notification is executed when the state that is not made continues for 30 seconds that is the second notification waiting time that is shorter than the first notification waiting time of 60 seconds, the game is executed after the promotion notification is executed. When the state in which the stop operation is not made effective again continues, the promotion notification is executed earlier than the beginning, so that the operating rate of the slot machine 1 can be more effectively prevented from being lowered.

  Further, the notification patterns 1 and 2 of the promotion notification display the characters “Please stop the reel” on the notification screen, and the characters and background colors thereof are different, but the notification mode is the above pattern. The message content and display mode are not limited and can be variously changed.

  In the notification pattern lottery, two types of notification patterns having different character colors and background colors of the displayed characters are selected with different probabilities depending on the winning status of the bonus flag. You may make it select from the alerting | reporting pattern more than a kind.

  In addition, the notification patterns 1 and 2 in the present embodiment display characters that prompt the stop operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and either one is selected according to the winning status of the bonus flag. However, along with the execution of such promotion notification, for example, the winning combination in the aforementioned internal lottery may be notified with a predetermined probability.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the promotion notification is executed once in one game, the notification waiting time (60 seconds) until the first promotion notification is executed when the stop operation is not performed. Promotion notification is executed when a shorter notification waiting time (30 seconds) elapses, but all notification waiting times may be the same.

  Further, in this embodiment, the time measuring means for measuring the notification waiting time is constituted by one notification timer counter, and the first value (= 60 seconds) is set when the reel rotation start command is acquired. When the reel stop command is acquired after the timer count starts, the timer count being executed is ended (reset) and the second value (= 30 seconds) is set. It was set to start the timer count, but the clocking based on the acquisition of the reel rotation start command and the clocking based on the acquisition of the reel stop command are each clocked separately. May be.

  In addition, for example, an execution history of promotion notification in each game is stored, and notification until the promotion notification is executed when the promotion notification is executed a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period (for example, for 5 minutes or between 50 games). The waiting time may be shorter than the normal notification waiting time. Further, in this case, the notification waiting time may be shortened step by step according to the promotion notification execution history.

  Furthermore, the time elapsed since the execution of the promotion notification as described above is started (display of the notification screen is started), for example, every time a predetermined time elapses (for example, every 1 minute elapses), In addition to the notification by changing the notification mode or displaying the notification screen, a voice message such as “Please stop reel” may be output from the speakers 53, 54, and the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the promotion notification is performed by displaying a notification screen including a character message prompting the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, but the liquid crystal display The notification screen may be displayed on an image display device other than 51, and the message content is not only the message “Please stop the reel” as described above, but also the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. If it is something, it can be changed to various messages such as “Please stop the design” and “Please operate the stop switch”, or display an image or a video that prompts you to stop the reel Things can be used.

  Further, the notification means for performing the promotion notification is not limited to the image display device such as the liquid crystal display 51 described above, and for example, “Please stop the reel” as described above from the speakers 53 and 54. Sound output means capable of outputting sound or outputting a predetermined warning sound may be used. Alternatively, for example, it may be a light emitting means for notifying by causing the reel LED 55 or the like to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, changing a lighting mode or a light emitting color).

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is in the proper range. If the determination process 1 is executed for each game and the value read from the set value work 1 is not a value in the range of 1 to 6, it is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In this embodiment, the value stored in the set value work 1, that is, the range of the set value that can be selected by the setting change process is a value of 1 to 6, so the value stored in the set value work 1 is 1 to 6. If the value is not in the range, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Further, a process for determining whether or not the set bet number is a bet number according to the gaming state is executed for each game, and the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state. Control of the error state due to the RAM abnormal error disables the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the number of bets corresponding to each gaming state is determined, but if the game is played with a bet number different from the bet number, is the data stored in the RAM 41c broken? Or, since there is a possibility that an unauthorized program is operating, even if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Then, once controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. Is not released. In other words, if the set value is not appropriate due to garbled data or illegal program operation, or if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, the set value automatically set by the slot machine The game is executed based on the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, since the setting change operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, the setting value selected by the amusement store side). Since it is ensured that the game is played, the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, whether the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 match, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery and the setting set when the setting is changed. When the set value determination process 2 for determining whether or not the values match is executed for each game, and the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 do not match However, it is controlled to an error state due to an abnormal RAM error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In the present embodiment, the setting value after the change is stored in each of the setting value work 1 and the setting value work 2 when the setting is changed. Normally, the value stored in the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 are stored. The values stored in the table should match, and if these values do not match, the setting value may have been rewritten illegally, and in this case, the progress of the game is disabled. Become.

  In addition, whether the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the internal lottery of the previous game. The set value determination process 3 for determining whether or not the set value matches is executed for each game, and the value read from the set value work 1 does not match the value read from the set value work 3 Even in this case, the game is controlled in an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In this embodiment, the set value used for the internal lottery is stored in the set value work 3, and normally the value stored in the set value 1 (the set value used in the internal lottery of the current game) and The value stored in setting value 3 (the setting value used in the previous internal lottery of the game) should match, and if these values do not match, the setting value may have been illegally rewritten. In this case, the progress of the game is disabled.

  And once it is controlled to the error state due to the RAM abnormality error by these determinations, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. The normalized state is not released. In other words, in order to restart the game when there is a possibility that the setting value has been illegally rewritten, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation that is more time-consuming than the reset operation for canceling the normal error state. Cheating can be effectively prevented.

  If there is a possibility that the setting value has been rewritten illegally, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, Since the setting change operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the unused area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is initialized for each game. Therefore, even if an illegal program is stored using the unused area of the RAM 41c, It is possible to prevent unauthorized programs from being resident.

  Further, in this embodiment, the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized for each game in addition to the unused area in the RAM 41c, so that all the unused areas in the RAM 41c at that time are stored for each game. For example, even if it is attempted to store an illegal program using an unused stack area without using an unused area of the RAM 41c, there is no room for the illegal program to reside. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the unauthorized program from being resident, and for example, to add unauthorized data (such as an address specified by the unauthorized program) to the unused stack area, causing the microcomputer to malfunction when the data is restored. By rewriting the register to an illegal one, the original program Fraud can be prevented that would carry out the operation different from the. Further, by storing illegal data in the unused stack area, an area where the saved data should be stored can be compressed, the stack area overflows, and the micro that configures the main control unit 41 is stored. Problems such as the computer running away can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized for each game. However, at least one of the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized for each game. Anything that can be initialized is acceptable.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the end of the game, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are set for each game. If the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized at least once per game, but the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized. The timing for performing the conversion may be any timing during one game. For example, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c may be initialized at the start of the game or when a process that is always executed for each game is executed. It may be one that performs the conversion.

  Also, before the start of setting (before transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of activation, when the four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, In addition to performing four types of initialization 1 to 4 which are initialized in different areas depending on each initialization condition, any of the four types of initialization conditions is satisfied, and an unused area in the RAM 41c is always Since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized, it is possible to more reliably prevent the illegal program from being resident.

  In particular, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup, the unused area in the RAM 41c and the unused stack area in the stack area are always initialized. Therefore, the unused area and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are used. Even when an unauthorized program or unauthorized data is stored, it is possible to prevent the control state of the main control unit 41 from returning based on the data in the RAM 41c while the unauthorized program or the unauthorized data is stored.

  In addition, in the power interruption interrupt processing, after destructive diagnosis data with any bit set to 1 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c, the RAM parity based on all data including the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c. RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that becomes 0, and RAM parity calculated based on data stored in all areas including the unused area and unused stack area in the RAM 41c at the time of restoration Whether or not destructive diagnosis data is stored, and if the RAM parity is not 0, or even if the RAM parity is 0, the destructive diagnosis data is stored normally. If not, an error state due to a RAM error occurs, and the setting key switch 37 is ON and the power Until the initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, the progress of the game is impossible. Therefore, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the time of startup. Even if a malicious program is stored in the computer, the malicious program can be found and initialized.

  Further, when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal and a RAM abnormal error state occurs, initialization 1 is performed to initialize all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c. Even when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned on after that, all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c Since the initialization 1 is performed, the malicious program that may be stored in the RAM 41c can be surely removed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the progress of the game is disabled, and the error state once caused by the RAM abnormality error. If it is controlled, the state in which the progress of the game is disabled will not be released unless the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change Since the operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the CPU 41a running out of control. For this reason, in this embodiment, since it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the CPU 41a is activated after recovering from these states, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. The determination can be made only in a situation where there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data, it is not necessary to perform the determination, and the load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the result of the exclusive OR operation is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c in the power interruption processing, that is, Since it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all the areas in the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is 0, the determination is made as follows. It can be performed accurately and conveniently.

  In the present embodiment, in the interruption interrupt process, destruction diagnosis data (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c. After that, adjustment data for which the RAM parity is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c including the destructive diagnosis data is stored, and in addition to the determination of whether the RAM parity is 0 at the start-up, the destructive diagnosis data Is determined to be normal, and the RAM 41c is determined to be normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is also normally stored. The control state is restored based on the data stored in. As a result, when 00H is stored in all areas, that is, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0 even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is normal by the determination of the RAM parity at startup. If the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0, the area in which the destructive diagnosis data is to be stored is also 0, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c has the correct contents at the time of activation.

  Further, when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM parity is 0 at startup and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normally stored, and determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the destructive diagnosis stored in the RAM 41c. Since the data for destruction diagnosis is still stored in the RAM 41c even after the activation, the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the next activation, but the data is destroyed. Since diagnostic data is stored, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination as normal.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data in the RAM 41c and the progress of the game is disabled, a setting value changing operation as a condition for canceling the disabled state of the game is effective. As a result of the transition to the setting change mode (setting change processing), all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, so that the initial data of the RAM 41c due to the occurrence of an abnormality And initialization of data associated with selection / setting of set values can be performed at once, and unnecessary processing can be omitted. Further, when the CPU 41a is activated, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON before determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal. At that time, the setting key switch 37 is ON. If it is determined that there is, the determination as to whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal is not performed, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode, where a new setting value is selected and set. It can be omitted.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed before shifting to the setting change process. However, along with the shift to the setting change process. Initialization 1 may be performed, for example, after the setting change process is completed, or may be performed when the setting value is confirmed in the setting change process. In this case, since the inconvenience arises when the determined set value is changed, in initialization 1, all areas except the used stack area and the set value work of the RAM 41c are initialized. Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, once the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the game is disabled until the setting change process is performed, but the error state due to the RAM abnormality error occurs. When initialization is performed, all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and a set value is set to an initial value (for example, set value 1), and a reset operation is performed in this state. Thus, the game may be restarted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the voltage drop signal is input to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG, the CPU 41a interrupts the process being executed and executes the power interruption process. In the process including the process for setting the data for destructive diagnosis and the process for calculating and setting the data for adjusting the RAM parity, the process for making it possible to determine whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery or the initial setting of the output port It is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA before performing the conversion or the like. If the voltage drop signal is also input to the signal input terminal DATA, the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery. If the voltage drop signal is not input to the signal input terminal DATA, the original processing is performed. It is adapted to return.

  That is, the voltage drop signal is input to the two systems of the input unit to the main control unit 41, and the CPU 41a does not perform the power interruption interrupt process when the voltage drop signal is input to one of the input units. Before the process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the initialization of the output port, or the like is performed, it is determined again whether or not the voltage drop signal is input to the other input unit. These processes are executed only when a voltage drop signal is also input to the input section of this, and when power failure is detected by mistake, whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery is detected. Since it is possible to prevent the process for enabling the determination and the process such as the initialization of the output port from being performed, the control of the CPU 41a may be interrupted for an unnecessarily long time due to erroneous detection of power interruption. More than necessary Possible to prevent the load is applied to.

  In addition, other interrupts are prohibited during the execution of the power interruption interrupt process and the timer interrupt process (main). For example, the voltage drops during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main). Even when a signal is input, double interruptions do not occur, and it is possible to prevent the processing load on the CPU 41a from increasing and data consistency from being lost. In particular, even if a voltage drop signal is input during the transmission of a command, no interruption occurs and the transmission of the command is not hindered, and the transmission can be completed normally before the CPU 41a stops driving. .

  If the interrupt timing of the power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of the timer interrupt processing (main) are simultaneous, that is, if interrupt 2 and interrupt 3 occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 Priority is given to the power interruption interrupt process, and if interrupt 2 occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main), the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt process (main) ends. Since interrupt processing is performed and power interruption interrupt processing is performed at the earliest possible stage while preventing multiple interrupts, it is ensured that power interruption interrupt processing is performed before the CPU 41a stops driving. It can be carried out.

  Further, the CPU 41a can execute four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4, and when interrupts 1 and 4 that are set to unused are generated, the CPU 41a immediately returns to the original process. The unused interrupt processing to be executed is executed. For this reason, even if unused interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the process immediately returns to the process before the interrupt. Therefore, even if an unused interrupt occurs due to noise or the like, the CPU 41a runs out of control. It is possible to prevent such troubles.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and the BB winning effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. As long as possible, medals stored as credits (including medals used to set bets) can be returned even during periods when setting bets is prohibited. Reflecting the will of the player, the medal for the credit stored as owned by the player can be received. Thus, for example, in a game in which a big bonus prize has occurred, before starting the big bonus game accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize, a part of the medal memorized as the credit is given as a prize (for example, a soft drink or a cigarette). Etc.), but it is possible to receive a medal return reflecting such a player's will.

  In addition, when a big bonus prize is generated, an effect at the time of BB winning indicating that the big bonus prize has occurred is executed, so that the player's interest in shifting to the big bonus accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize is effective. Can be enhanced.

  Also, in the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and setting of the bet number is prohibited until the ending effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. Can be returned as a credit (including medals used to set the number of bets), so as much as possible to reflect the player's will, It is possible to receive a medal for the credit stored as owned by the player. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  Further, since the ending effect indicating that the big bonus has ended is executed at the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the end of the big bonus can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, even in a game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, even when the game is controlled to be stopped, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, the game ends, and the store clerk performs a reset operation. Medals stored as credits (including medals used to set bets) are to be returned even during the period when setting of bets is prohibited until the stoppage is released Therefore, it is possible to receive medals for credits stored as belonging to the player, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  In addition, after a determination is made that the game in which the big bonus prize has occurred is terminated, a power interruption occurs in the period until the BB prize presentation effect waiting time elapses. When the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time, the prohibition on the setting of the bet number is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas the BB prize is won. When power interruption occurs in the stage before the time effect reaches the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the start of the BB winning effect, the power is cut off before the end of the BB winning effect, and after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received during execution of the time effect, the current BB winning effect is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so the BB winning effect is troublesome for the player. The control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant in spite of the fact that the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, and there is a discrepancy between both control states. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and backs up that the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage at the next activation. If so, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the fact that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is backed up, the BB winning effect is returned to the final stage state. Yes. For this reason, when power interruption occurs in a state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed is not executed from the beginning after the return, so the BB winning effect is performed. Can be more effectively prevented from becoming annoying for the player.

  Also, for example, during the period from the determination of the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred until the BB winning stage production waiting time elapses, credit settlement is executed, and medals are being paid out along with this settlement. When a payout error occurs and the payout error is canceled, the bet amount is set when the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error has elapsed from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect. When the prohibition is canceled and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled. The BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the BB winning effect is started, the error state is controlled before the BB winning effect is finished, and when the error state is canceled after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. If a new command is received during the execution of the BB winning effect, the effect based on the newly received command is executed after the BB winning effect being executed is cancelled, and the BB winning effect is displayed by the player. Can be prevented, and the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the progress of the control state on the main control unit 41 side, and there is a discrepancy between the two control states. It can be prevented from occurring.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of the error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It comes to return in the state of. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is not set, a power interruption occurs after the end of the game for which the end condition of the big bonus has been established, and until the ending effect production waiting time elapses. In the case of returning, when the time excluding the time already passed before power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time of the ending effect, the prohibition on setting of the bet amount is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted On the other hand, if a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, when the ending effect is started and then interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then returned from the power interruption, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When the command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player, and the main Although the control state on the control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and if the fact that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage at the next start-up is backed up, If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is returned to the final stage. For this reason, if a power interruption occurs when the ending effect has reached the final stage, the ending effect that was being executed will not be executed from the beginning after the return, so the ending effect is troublesome for the player. Can be effectively prevented.

  In addition, when the stop function is not set, after the end of the game for which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined and the waiting time for the ending effect is over, for example, credit settlement is performed. If a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with this settlement, and the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time of the ending production At that point, the prohibition on setting of the number of bets is lifted and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, whereas a payout error occurs at the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage. When the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, it is controlled to an error state before the ending effect ends, and when the error state is canceled after that, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of the error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It comes to return in the state of. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, it is determined that the power interruption occurs in the period until the waiting time for the ending effect is over. When returning, after the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and the stop state is released. The prohibition on the setting of the bet number is also released at that time, and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas a power outage occurs before the ending effect reaches the final stage, and then returns The ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, the power is interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then the ending effect is executed from the beginning when the power is restored from the power interruption. When the command indicating the start of the state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the in-stop notification is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming troublesome for the player, Although the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, when the stop function is set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied is determined and until the ending effect production waiting time elapses, for example, credit settlement is performed. If a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with this settlement, and the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time of the ending production After the elapse of time, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is also released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. If a payout error occurs before the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect It is performed from the initial course stages. For this reason, after an ending effect is started, if an error occurs before the ending effect ends, and then the error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a command indicating the start of the stop state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the stop notification is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the ending effect from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, the time required to execute the progress stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the time until the transition to the final stage is determined as the waiting time for the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the end of the game. Since the set time is shorter than the time when the setting of the bet number is prohibited, the BB winning that was executed after returning to the final stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect was cut off. Even when the time effect and the ending effect are executed from the beginning, the overlapping period between the period when the BB winning effect and the ending effect are executed and the period until the prohibition of the setting of the bet number is canceled, It is possible to prevent the discrepancy between the control states of both the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 as much as possible.

  In this embodiment, before the BB winning effect and the ending effect waiting time elapses, an error occurs and the BB winning effect and the ending effect are awaited while the error is being controlled. The timing of the waiting time for the BB winning effect and the ending effect is resumed from the time when the timing of the time is interrupted and the error state is canceled. The time measurement may be performed without interruption even while it is controlled to the error state, and in this way, when the error state is canceled, the prohibition of the setting of the bet amount is canceled, The bet number can be set as early as possible and the bet number set in this state cancels the resumed BB winning effect and ending effect. Therefore, these effects are not bothersome for the player, but the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the progress of the control state on the main control unit 41 side, It is possible to prevent a difference in state from occurring.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the regular bonus is activated at the same time as the transition to the big bonus. During the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is activated for each game. When it is determined that it is not activated, the regular bonus is activated again, so that the regular bonus is always controlled while the big bonus is activated. For this reason, it is only necessary to control the regular bonus while the big bonus is in operation, so the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. Since the determination as to whether or not is made, the control program of each game in the big bonus can be made common regardless of whether or not the regular bonus is in operation, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, while the big bonus is in operation, the regular bonus is always controlled so that the medals can be increased fastest during the big bonus. Therefore, the regular bonus is activated in accordance with the JACIN winning as in the conventional case. It is possible to enhance the interest of the player with the shift to the big bonus. In particular, the end condition is satisfied when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds a specified value (465 in this embodiment) without ending the big bonus at the number of transitions to the regular bonus as in this embodiment. If it is established, the number of net increase in the big bonus can be increased, so that the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the big bonus can be further increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is inactive, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus is activated. If the regular bonus is not activated, the regular bonus is activated. There is no determination for reactivating the device, that is, no unnecessary determination is made.

  In this embodiment, after the regular bonus operation starts, the number of games controlled by the regular bonus reaches the specified number of games (12 games in this embodiment) or the specified number of games (8 in this embodiment). ) The game ends when a winning occurs. However, the regular bonus may be ended under only one of the conditions. It may be completed only when it occurs. Also, it may end when the total number of medals paid out and the net increase in the regular bonus (the total number of medals paid out minus the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets) exceeds a prescribed number. The process may be terminated when any one of these conditions is satisfied.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the operation of the big bonus is started, the big bonus is ended when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds a predetermined value (465 in this embodiment). However, the big bonus may be terminated under other conditions. For example, the net increase in the number of medals in the big bonus (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets from the total number of medals paid out) Ends when the number exceeds the specified value, the number of games controlled by the big bonus reaches the specified number of games, the number of transitions to the regular bonus reaches the specified number, and the regular bonus ends To complete the Big Bonus end condition, or if any of these conditions is satisfied, the Big Bonus end condition It may be established.

  Also, in this embodiment, during the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game, but at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated, By activating the regular bonus again at the end of the regular bonus, the regular bonus may always be controlled while the big bonus is active. While it is necessary to control only the regular bonus while the game is in progress, it is possible to simplify the control associated with the transition to the big bonus, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not the regular bonus is in operation for each game. If the process to reactivate the regular bonus is performed only when the regular bonus ends In prayer, unnecessary processing will not be performed in a state where the control of the regular bonus has not been completed.

  Also, in this case, at the end of the regular bonus, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied before the regular bonus is activated again, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If not, it is preferable to activate the regular bonus again. By doing so, the regular bonus is not reactivated even though the big bonus ends immediately.

  In addition, after the transition to the big bonus, the first regular bonus may be triggered by the occurrence of a specific winning or the like, and the subsequent regular bonus may be reactivated at the end of the regular bonus.

  In the present embodiment, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus has elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed. When the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops and the output waiting time elapses in this state. The output of the RB signal is restarted again. For this reason, it is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by an external device that has received an RB signal, for example, whether or not the slot machine is operating normally from the externally output signal. Can be properly implemented with an external device.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the CPU 41a determines whether or not the prize is abnormal, if the value of the bit assigned to each kind of the combination is 0, it indicates that the winning of the combination is permitted. If the value is 1, the abnormal winning determination flag indicating that the winning of the winning combination is not permitted, and the value of the bit assigned to each winning type is 1, the fact that the winning combination has been won And a winning symbol flag indicating that the winning combination has not been won when it is 1, and F indicates whether the calculation result is 0, that is, whether the calculation result is 0 or not. It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning only by referring to the value of the zero flag of the register. Since it is not necessary to confirm, it is judged whether it is an abnormal prize. It can be processed simplified when performing.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the value of the bit assigned to each type of the combination is 1, it indicates that the winning of the corresponding combination is permitted, and when it is 0, the winning of the corresponding combination is permitted. An internal winning flag indicating that there is not present is set in the internal winning flag storing work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c, and an operation for reversing 1 and 0 of each bit of the winning flag is performed, whereby an abnormal winning determination flag is set. It is designed to create. That is, the abnormal winning determination flag can be easily created using the winning flag.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when an abnormal winning occurs, that is, when a combination that is not permitted in the game is won, the game is controlled to an error state due to an abnormal winning error and the progress of the game is disabled. Is done. That is, when an unacceptable winning combination wins, the data may be destroyed or an abnormal program may be operating, so that the progress of the game is disabled.

  Once an error state due to a RAM error or an abnormal winning error is controlled, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting change operation. The normalized state is not released. In other words, if the set value is not appropriate due to garbled data or abnormal program operation, or if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state, or if an unacceptable hand wins, the slot machine The setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation instead of the setting value automatically set by (the setting change operation is generally performed by an employee of the amusement store. Since it is ensured that the game is played based on the value), the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a transmits a command corresponding to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Since the CPU 41a does not need to control the presentation only by sending a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the presentation can be made various. .

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the rotation of the reel is started and when the reel is stopped and the reel that is still rotating still remains, the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b are referred to. In addition, a stop control table is created for each spinning reel, but the internal control state for each gaming state and the stop control table for each reel stop state (and stopped stop position) are stored in the ROM 41b in advance. Based on the table index, it is possible to specify the necessary stop control table according to the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop state of the reel, and when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel Refer to the table index when the reels that have stopped and are still rotating still remain. By Le may be set a stop control table.

  In the above embodiment, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (one symbol) are defined for one reel, and the stop control table corresponds to each area (area number). Then, the reel is used by using the stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined, that is, the stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely determined corresponding to the area where one symbol varies. For example, the number of drawing steps and the number of drawing frames (stop position) are uniquely set for each area of less than one symbol, for example, one step, that is, for every minimum unit when driving the reel motor. The reel stop control may be performed using a predetermined stop control table, and in this way, the stop position can be changed in units of the number of steps of the reel motor, and the stop operation position Against can be further diversified the stop position.

  Moreover, in the said Example, among the some stop control tables which defined the number of drawing | drawing tops with respect to a stop operation position uniquely, each internal winning state of each game state, the reel stop condition (and stop position stopped) A stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the selected stop control table and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. Is used in place of the stop control table, and when the stop operation is detected, the stop position specifying table is referred to and the reel is stopped at the stop position uniquely specified corresponding to the stop operation position. You may do it.

  Further, by defining a stop priority for the stop position, a plurality of stop priority tables that uniquely determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position) are used instead of the stop control table. When a stop operation is detected, the stop priority table is referenced, and the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 5 frames) from the stop operation position are compared, and the highest stop priority is obtained. You may make it perform the control which stops a reel in a stop position.

  Also, select the number of draws that is uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). When a stop operation is performed, if the target stop position is within the range of the selected number of pull-in frames, pull-in control is performed to pull the stop position and stop, and the stop is prohibited. It is also possible to perform kicking control (so-called control method control) in which other stop positions are pulled in and stopped so as not to stop the stop position. Since the stop position is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (number of steps from the reel reference position) by performing the pull-in control and the kick-off control in this way, the control for deriving the display result by the pull-in control and the kick-off control is It can be said that this is a control pattern for uniquely specifying the stop position with respect to the stop operation position.

  In addition, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state, the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel), If the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the reel stop control by the pull-in control and the kicking control are performed in combination. For example, only the reel that has stopped first may be controlled to stop the reel by using the stop control table, and the other reels may be controlled to be stopped by pull-in control and kicking control.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel) is selected and its control is performed. The reel stop control is performed according to the pattern, but at least a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected control pattern. If it is good.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the value of 6 steps of the range of 1-6 is applied as a setting value used for internal lottery, ie, the setting value which determined the winning probability of internal lottery, a setting value is restricted to this. Any setting value can be used as long as it can select and set at least a plurality of setting values. For example, a setting value that can select two levels of high / low and a setting value of three levels in the range of 1 to 3 can be selected. Selectable setting values may be applied. Furthermore, the set values work 1 to 3 in the RAM 41c store the values 1 to 6 themselves as values indicating these set values, but any value that can specify the set value may be stored. For example, 0 to 5 (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the actual setting value) corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 may be stored in the setting value works 1 to 3.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the setting value determination process 1 which determines whether the value read from the setting value work 1 is the range of 1-6, the value read from the setting value work 1, and the reading from the setting value work 2 Set value determination processing 2 for determining whether or not the values match, set value determination for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match All of the processing 3 is executed to determine whether or not the setting value used for the internal lottery is appropriate. However, by performing any one of these setting value determination processing 1 to 3, the internal lottery For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the set value to be used is appropriate. For example, only the set value determination process 1, only the set value determination process 2, or only the set value determination process 3 is performed. What to do, one of the set value determination processes 1 to 3 One of the processing to perform, or the like may be used.

  Further, any one of the set value determination processes 1 to 3 is performed for each game, and the remaining one process or all of the remaining processes are performed at a predetermined opportunity (for example, every predetermined number of games, at the end of the bonus, Or two of the set value determination processes may be performed for each game, and the remaining one process may be performed with a predetermined opportunity.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the setting value determination processes 1-3 are performed for every game, it does not perform a setting value determination process for every game, but sets the setting value determination processes 1-3 for the predetermined number of games. It may be performed every time or in a game of a specific period (such as a period excluding bonus).

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the setting value determination process 1-3 which determines whether the setting value used for an internal lottery is appropriate in the internal lottery process, the timing is in 1 game Any timing may be used, for example, at the start of the game or at the end of the game.

  In the embodiment, in the internal lottery process, the value of the set value work 3 is updated to the value read from the set value work 1 (the set value read for use in the internal lottery of the current game). The timing at which the value of the set value work 3 is updated to the value read from the set value work 1 is any timing until the game ends (for example, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, Etc.) at the end of the withdrawal.

  In the embodiment, when the setting is changed, the set value is stored in the two areas of the set value work 1 and the set value work 2. In the set value determination process 2, the value stored in the set value work 1 and the setting are stored. It is determined whether or not the value stored in the value work 2 matches, and if it does not match, it is determined that it is not an appropriate setting value, but the setting value is stored in three or more storage areas when the setting is changed. In the set value determination process 2, it is determined whether or not all the values stored in these three or more storage areas match, and if they do not match, it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate setting value. Also good.

  Furthermore, when the setting is changed, the set value is stored in three or more storage areas. In the set value determination process 2, whether or not the values stored in these three or more areas match a predetermined number or more (for example, 5 Setting values are stored in one storage area, and it is determined whether or not three or more of the values match, and if a predetermined number or more does not match, it may be determined that the setting values are not appropriate. In this way, even if a part of the data indicating the setting value stored at the time of changing the setting is lost due to noise or the like, it is erroneously determined that the setting value is not appropriate and the progress of the game is disabled. Can be prevented.

  In the above embodiment, only the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game is stored in the set value work 3. In the set value determination process 3, the value stored in the set value work 1 and the set value work 3 are stored. Whether the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game match and match. If not, it is determined that the setting value is not appropriate, but the setting value used for the internal lottery of each game is stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the setting value determination processing 3 It is determined whether or not the set value used for the lottery matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the game before the previous game (for example, a game before a predetermined number of games). Appropriate setting In it it may be determined that there is no.

  In addition, the setting values used for the internal lottery of each game are stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the setting values used for the internal lottery of the current game in the setting value determination process 3 and a plurality of values before the previous game It may be determined whether or not all the set values used in the internal lottery of the game match, and if they do not match, it is determined that the set values are not appropriate.

  Furthermore, the set values used for the internal lottery of each game are stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the set values used for the internal lottery of the current game in the set value determination process 3 and a plurality of values before the previous game are stored. Whether or not each set value used for the internal lottery of the game matches a predetermined number or more (for example, each set value used for the internal lottery of the past five games is stored in five storage areas, of which 3 It is also possible to determine whether or not two or more values match, and if it does not match a predetermined number or more, it may be determined that the setting value is not an appropriate setting value. Even when a part of the data indicating the set value stored at the time is lost, it is possible to prevent the game from being disabled due to an erroneous determination that the set value is not appropriate.

  Further, in the embodiment, when determining the winning of the winning in the internal lottery process, if it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate set value in the set value determining process, the RAM is controlled to be in an abnormal error state. However, when the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is not an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6), a prize is won with a probability based on the initial value of the set value (for example, the set value 1). You may make it determine the winning of.

  In the embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 0 in the power interruption processing, and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is 0 at the time of restoration. Although it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, of course, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 in the power interruption processing, and the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 at the time of restoration. By determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, it may be determined. Further, the checksum (exclusive OR of the data stored in the corresponding area) of all areas of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing, and is stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, the RAM 41c is restored. If the result is 00H, it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, and if it is not 00H, the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal. You may make it determine with it.

  If the checksum is stored normally in the power interruption processing, the checksum of the area excluding the specific area and the data stored in the specific area (the checksum calculated at the time of power interruption) ) Should take the same value, and if the checksum of the area excluding the specific area matches the data stored in the specific area, the result of calculating the exclusive OR of both data is This is because the result of calculating the checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum of the RAM 41c is stored is 00H, so that the data of the RAM 41c can be determined to be normal.

  Even in this case, in the power interruption interrupt processing, before the checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data (for example, 5AH) in which any bit is 1 is stored in a predetermined address, and at the time of recovery, In addition to determining whether or not the checksum is 00H, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The condition is that the checksum is 00H and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normal. In addition, it is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal. Even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, if 00H is stored in all areas, it is determined to be normal by the checksum determination at the time of startup, but any bit is set to 1 at the time of power failure. After destructive diagnostic data is stored, the checksum is calculated and stored in a specific area. In addition to checking the checksum at startup, the destructive diagnostic data is also checked. Even when all the areas are cleared to 0 and the checksum is 00H and is determined to be normal, the destruction diagnosis data does not match the value stored at the time of the power failure and is determined to be abnormal. It is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the abnormality of the data stored in.

  In the above, the RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing and stored in the RAM 41c, and whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of restoration is 0. Or whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal based on whether or not the checksum calculated based on all the areas of the RAM 41c is 00H. In the interruption interrupt processing, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is determined. Alternatively, a checksum is calculated and stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, a RAM parity or checksum excluding the specific area of the RAM 41c is calculated and compared with the RAM parity or checksum stored in the specific area. Data in RAM 41c is normal depending on whether the results match Whether may be determined. In this case as well, as described above, before the RAM parity or checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address. In addition to determining whether or not the sums match, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, the RAM parity and checksum match, and the destructive diagnostic data is also normal. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal under the above conditions.

  In the above embodiment, 5AH is stored in the RAM 41c as the failure diagnosis data in the power interruption processing. However, any data other than 0 can be stored and confirmed at the start-up. Even in the configuration, when all areas are cleared to 0 at the time of startup, the data for destruction diagnosis does not match the value stored at the time of a power failure and is determined to be abnormal, so it is stored in the RAM 41c. The accuracy of data abnormality determination can be increased.

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 41a is started, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is calculated, it is determined whether or not the result is 0, and the destructive diagnosis data is normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. However, first, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, and on condition that the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The RAM parity of the RAM 41c may be calculated and it may be determined whether or not the result is 0. In this way, if the destructive diagnosis data is not normally stored, the RAM parity is calculated. Without calculation, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  In the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal only when the main control unit 41 is activated. However, the determination may be made every other opportunity, for example, for each game.

  In the embodiment, the main control unit 41 is activated based on a reset signal from a reset circuit 49 provided separately from the main control unit 41. However, the reset circuit is connected to the main control unit 41. The microcomputer which comprises may be mounted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the RAM 41c is mounted on the microcomputer constituting the main control unit 41. However, a RAM used as a work of the microcomputer may be mounted outside the microcomputer.

  In the embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the DC voltage used in the slot machine 1 and detects the power interruption when the DC voltage becomes a certain voltage or lower. You may make it detect a power interruption, when the period when the said DC voltage became below a fixed voltage continued for a fixed period. Alternatively, the AC voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 may be monitored to detect a power interruption when a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected or when the period continues for a certain period.

  In the above embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 is mounted on the game control board 40. However, the power interruption detection circuit 48 may be mounted in other places. For example, the game control board 40 may be connected to the power supply board 100 or the power supply board 100. It may be mounted on a relay board or the like through which a power supply line is connected.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the error is alert | reported by displaying on the game auxiliary | assistance display 12 the error code according to the error state on the content of various error states. In other words, the notification means controlled by the game control unit 41 notifies the sub-control unit 91 of a command indicating an error state in addition to the notification means controlled by the game control unit 41. The notification unit controlled by the control unit 91 may notify the error, or the notification unit controlled by the game control unit 41 does not perform the notification, but the notification unit controlled by the sub-control unit 91 An error notification may be performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning, after the game ends at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is set to be invalid, after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning, Until the ending waiting time elapses, after the ending waiting time elapses at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is enabled, the clerk performs a reset operation until the stop state is released The setting of the number of bets is prohibited in any of the periods, but any setting is possible as long as the setting of the number of bets is prohibited in at least one of these periods.

  Further, although the slot machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with a stop function, it may be applied to a slot machine not equipped with a stop function.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the waiting time for producing the BB winning effect and the waiting time for producing the BB end effect may be the same time or different times.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus winning is applied as the transition winning in which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited for a certain period of time (the waiting time for production of the BB winning effect) at the time of winning. Regular bonus winning etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to multiple types of special roles. Furthermore, even for special roles of the same type, one of a plurality of types of bonus bonuses and regular bonus winnings (for example, a combination of symbols constituting the bonus winning, a color of symbols constituting the bonus winning) Or if the two are different, or if the bonus consists of different bonus controls, such as the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Sometimes the setting of the number of bets may be prohibited for a certain period. In addition, the period during which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited at the time of winning may differ depending on the type of special combination (big bonus winning and regular bonus winning), and the type of big bonus winning or regular bonus winning. Then, an effect at the time of bonus winning having a different execution time may be executed according to a period during which setting of the bet number is prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special gaming state in which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited for a certain period of time (ending waiting time for producing the ending effect) at the end, but other special gaming states (regular) Bonus etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. In addition, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are multiple types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols constituting a bonus prize that triggers the transition to the bonus, timing for transitioning to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be set to be prohibited for a certain period at the end. Further, the period during which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited at the end may differ depending on the type of special gaming state (big bonus and regular bonus) and the type of big bonus or regular bonus. And you may make it perform the ending effect from which execution time differs according to the period when the setting of the number of bets is prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special game state controlled to the stop state in which the setting of the bet number is prohibited until the reset operation is performed after the end, but other special game states (Regular Bonus etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. In addition, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are multiple types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols constituting a bonus prize that triggers the transition to the bonus, timing for transitioning to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be controlled to be stopped after completion.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even in a game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, at the time when the end of the game is determined, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled and the setting of the bet amount is prohibited ( In the ending effect stage waiting time, the credit can be settled. For example, in a game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined is the ending effect stage waiting time. Control to the stop state when reaching the, and prohibit both setting of the number of bets and the settlement of the credit until the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined reaches the production waiting time of the ending effect, When the elapsed time reaches the production waiting time for the ending production, only the prohibition of credit settlement may be canceled. As a result, in the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the credit cannot be settled until the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. Since it is possible to settle credits without waiting for the release of the stop state, the medal for the credits stored as owned by the player should be returned, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. Can receive. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed, particularly when the big bonus ends.

  In the above embodiment, the end of the game is determined by the end of the game end processing. However, the game is substantially ended by the end of the medal payout. The end may be determined. In other words, the credit can be settled from the end of the payout process.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the timer counter common to the production wait time timer count for timing the production waiting time for the BB winning production and the production wait time timer count for measuring the production waiting time for the ending production is provided. However, these timer counters may be provided separately.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0 in the winning flag. In the winning symbol flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0. Then, all the bits of the internal winning flag are inverted, and a logical product (AND) with the winning symbol flag is calculated, and when the result becomes 00H (all bits are 0), other than the regular winning, other than 00H (any one) When the bit becomes 1), it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60, after calculating the logical product (AND) of the value obtained by inverting all the bits of the winning flag and the winning symbol flag, as in the above embodiment, all of the values thus calculated are calculated. The bits may be further inverted, and it may be determined that the regular winning is achieved when the result is FFH (all bits are 1), and the abnormal winning is determined when the result is other than FFH (any bit is 0).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 61, after calculating the logical sum (OR) of the winning flag and the value obtained by inverting all the winning symbol flags, all the bits of the calculated value are further inverted, and the result is The regular winning may be determined when 00H (all bits are 0), and the abnormal winning may be determined when other than 00H (any bit is 1). In this case, as in the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether or not the prize is abnormal by simply checking the value of the zero flag of the F register (flag register) indicating whether the calculation result is 00H, that is, whether the calculation result is zero. Can be determined.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 62, a logical sum (OR) of the winning flag and the value obtained by inverting all the bits of the winning symbol is calculated, and when the result becomes FFH (all bits are 1), the regular winning is obtained. , FFH other than (any bit is 0), it may be determined as an abnormal winning.

  As described above, also in the modified examples of the abnormal winning determination shown in FIGS. 60 to 61, the logical sum operation or the logical product operation is performed on the winning flag or the value obtained by inverting the winning flag and the winning symbol flag or the value obtained by inverting the winning symbol flag. It is possible to determine whether the result is an abnormal prize or not only by determining whether the result is a value other than 0 or a value other than 1.

  In the case of FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, if the winning symbol flag set in accordance with winning is reversed in advance for all bits, that is, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 0, the other bits If the winning symbol flag is set so that the value of 1 becomes 1, the step of inverting all the bits of the winning symbol flag in the abnormal winning determination process becomes unnecessary.

  In the case of FIGS. 60 and 61, when determining whether or not the calculation result is FFH, 1 is added to the calculation result, and when the value after the addition overflows, it is determined that the calculation result is FFH. When the overflow does not occur, it is preferable to determine that the operation result is other than FFH. In such a case, it is only necessary to check the value of the carry flag of the F register indicating whether the operation result has overflowed. It is possible to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred.

  Next, as in the above embodiment, the winning flag has a value of 1 corresponding to the winning combination, and the other bits have a value of 0, and the winning symbol flag corresponds to the winning combination. A description will be given of a modified example in which an abnormal winning is determined without inverting all the bits of any flag when the bit value is 1 and the other bit values are 0.

  In this modification, the winning flag is applied as an abnormal winning determination flag. Then, from the value of each bit of the internal winning flag, the value of the bit at the same position in the winning symbol flag is subtracted, and on the condition that the subtraction result does not become a negative number in all the bits, whether or not it is an abnormal winning Determine whether. For example, the value of the 0th bit of the winning symbol flag is subtracted from the value of the 0th bit of the winning flag to determine whether or not the subtraction result is a negative number. Subtract the first bit value of the winning symbol flag from the value of the next bit, that is, the first bit of the internal winning flag, and determine the result. Finally, all the bits from the 0th bit to the 15th bit In step (1), it is determined that the winning is not abnormal, on the condition that the subtraction result does not become a negative number.

  In such a case, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning only by confirming the value of the sign flag of the F register indicating whether or not the calculation result has become a negative number. Furthermore, as in the above-described embodiments and modifications, it is possible to determine whether the winning flag or the winning symbol flag is an abnormal winning without inverting the bit.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the determination value number storage area | region of RAM41c in which the determination value number used for an internal lottery is memorize | stored shall memorize | store the determination value number in each case using a 2 byte area | region. Of course, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for special roles is not often set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. As described above, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, some of the determination values that are common regardless of the set value are stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6, but the number of determination values is related to the set value. Even common items can be individually stored for each of the setting values 1 to 6. Further, if the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, all of them can be stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6.

  Moreover, in the said Example, it was whether it memorize | stored in common with the whole setting value 1-6, or it memorize | stored separately with respect to each of the setting values 1-6 in the said Example. However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 4-6, the number of judgment values can also be made common.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) for the same combination or combination of combinations at the same set value is different for each gaming state (state number) Was stored. That is, the same combination or combination of combinations with the same set value is stored separately even if the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) is the same, but the gaming state (state number) Regardless of the combination of combinations or combinations of combinations that have the same winning probability regardless, the storage address of the judgment value number is shared, or the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value and gaming state (state number) For the combination or combination of combinations, the storage address of the determination value number may be made common, and by storing the determination value number in common in this way, the storage capacity required for this is reduced. It will be enough.

  In the embodiment, the number of determination values acquired according to the set value or the like is sequentially added to the random number value for internal lottery, but from the value of random number for internal lottery that acquired the acquired determination value number, Subtraction may be performed sequentially, and the result of the subtraction may be used as a new random value for internal lottery. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations corresponding to the gaming state is sequentially added to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and the addition result overflows The combination or combination of combinations was determined to be winning. On the other hand, a winning determination table that defines a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination as winning according to the number of determination values for each combination or combination according to the gaming state is determined for each game. The internal lottery may be performed by comparing the created and acquired random number value for internal lottery with the range of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations. In addition, a winning determination table in which a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination of combinations as winning is stored in the ROM 41b in advance, and the acquired random value for internal lottery is used as a range of determination values for each combination. It is good also as what performs an internal lottery by comparing with.

  In the above embodiment, the game can be started only by setting 3 as the number of bets in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, even in the normal gaming state, the game can be started by setting 1 as the bet number, and further, the game can be started by setting 2 as the bet number. Also good. As a result, when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery is lowered as compared with the case where 3 is set as the bet number, and the small role is won The number of paid out medals can be increased. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of Bell is 1 / 4.82 and the payout number is 7, but when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number, The winning probability may be lower than 1 / 4.82 and the payout number may be more than seven. Further, the winning probability of the bell and the number of payouts may be changed when 1 is set as the bet number and when 2 is set.

  In the embodiment, the slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slot machine for setting bets using game balls. Alternatively, it may be a complete credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, the ball capturing device 30 ′ and the ball capturing device 30 ′ for capturing the game ball are used. In addition to a medal payout mechanism such as a hopper motor 34 and a payout sensor 35, a ball payout device 34 ′ for paying out a game ball, a ball payout, and a take-in ball detection switch 31 ′ for detecting the taken game ball A payout ball detection switch 35 ′ for detecting a game ball paid out by the device 34 ′ is provided, and it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using both medals and game balls, and generating a prize. The present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows a winning combination table. It is a figure which shows the table according to a role. It is a figure which shows the memory area of the number of judgment values acquired based on the address registered into the table according to role. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table index stored in ROM41b. It is a figure which shows an example of a stop control table. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of an abnormal winning determination process, and the storing condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM, and RAM. It is a figure which shows an example of the external output signal output from a slot machine. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of BB signal and RB signal among external output signals. (A) is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting screen based on the alerting | reporting pattern 1 in the acceleration alerting | reporting which CPU of a sub-control part performs, (b) is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting screen based on the alerting | reporting pattern 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting pattern distribution table in the promotion alerting | reporting process which CPU of a sub-control part performs. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of a continuous effect, (b)-(d) is a figure which shows the continuous effect selection table for selecting the pattern of a continuous effect and an additional effect. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process performed when CPU of a main control part generate | occur | produces an error. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the adjustment process which CPU of a main control part performs in BET processing etc. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in an internal lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 1 which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 2 which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 3 which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of winning which CPU of a main control part performs in a winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the production waiting process which CPU of the main control part performs in the process at the time of a game end. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process performed when CPU of a main control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the continuous production | presentation process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of BET which CPU of a sub control part performs in a continuous effect process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time which CPU of a sub control part performs in a continuous effect process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel stop time process which CPU of a sub-control part performs in a continuous effect process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the promotion alerting | reporting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the promotion alerting | reporting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the promotion alerting | reporting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of a winning determination process, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM, and RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of a winning determination process, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM, and RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of a winning determination process, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM, and RAM. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of a structure of a slot machine.

Explanation of symbols

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 40 Game control board 41 Main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
90 Production control board 91 Sub control part 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (5)

Variable display capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipped with equipment,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game media, and one game is ended by displaying and displaying display results in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, the award winning accompanied with the granting of the game medium and the special winning accompanied with the transition of the special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state , and pre-determining means for determining whether or not to permit the generation of winning including,
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
A game medium granting means for granting a predetermined number of game media according to the type of the prize to be awarded when the prize is awarded;
In the special gaming state, special game control means for controlling for a predetermined period of time a special game that determines with a higher probability than the game in the normal gaming state that the predetermining means allows the generation of the awarded prize;
With
A plurality of game media are required to set a predetermined number of bets as a starting condition for the game,
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has not yet been derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, a derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is provided for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. From a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify one display result among a plurality of display results located within a predetermined range from the step number with respect to the step number of the stepping motor when operated. Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means includes
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed, at least one step number of the step numbers for a specific variable display region among the plurality of variable display regions Special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a special winning control pattern for specifying a specific display result,
When the pre-determining means determines that the generation of a specific award for which only one game medium is granted out of the award winnings is permitted, the specific award for the specific variable display area is determined. The number of steps different from the number of steps for specifying the display result constituting the specific award winning is specified for the number of steps where the display result to be configured is within the predetermined range. A specific award winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a specific award winning control pattern that identifies the specific display result for at least one of the number of steps;
When the decision to the effect that does not allow the occurrence of any of the winning by the predetermination means have been made, the display other than the specific display results from the number of any step of the step number for the particular variable display area A non-winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a non-winning control pattern for specifying a result;
The specific variable display area when the pre-determining means determines that the generation of a special award that accompanies a larger number of game media than the specific award among the award is made. A special grant that selects a special grant award control pattern that identifies a display result that constitutes the special award for a number of steps in which the display result that constitutes the special award win is within the predetermined range among the number of steps. Winning control pattern selection means,
Including
In the display band constituting the specific variable display area, the display result constituting the specific prize winning and the display result constituting the special prize winning are arranged at intervals exceeding the predetermined range,
The special grant award control pattern specifies a display result constituting the special grant award only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the specific grant award is located within the predetermined range,
The specific grant award control pattern specifies the display result constituting the specific grant award only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the special grant award is located within the predetermined range, Specifying the specific display result with respect to at least one number of steps out of the number of steps in which the display result constituting the special award winning is located within the predetermined range;
The special prize control pattern is the number of steps in which the display result constituting the special prize winning is located within the predetermined range, and the specific prize winning control pattern is the number of steps in which the specific display result is specified. Identifying the specific display result for at least one step number;
When the pre-determining means determines to allow the occurrence of the specific award winning while being controlled by the special game, the predetermined award that is given more number of game media than the specific award winning is provided. A slot machine that also decides to allow the occurrence of Variable display capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipped with equipment,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game media, and one game is ended by displaying and displaying display results in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, a special prize with a transition of a special game state that is advantageous to the player over the grant prize and the normal game state with the grant of the game medium , and and pre-determining means for determining whether or not to permit the generation of winning including,
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
A game medium granting means for granting a predetermined number of game media according to the type of the prize to be awarded when the prize is awarded;
In the special gaming state, special game control means for controlling for a predetermined period of time a special game that determines with a higher probability than the game in the normal gaming state that the predetermining means allows the generation of the awarded prize;
With
A plurality of game media are required to set a predetermined number of bets as a starting condition for the game,
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area , one display among a plurality of display results located within a predetermined range from the number of steps relative to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated results plurality of control patterns that uniquely identify the control patterns that uniquely select the control pattern corresponding to a combination display of the results of the variable display area determined result and already displayed result is the derivation of the pre-determining means Including a selection means,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Performing a control to derive a display result uniquely specified from the number of steps as a display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means includes
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed, at least one step number of the step numbers for a specific variable display region among the plurality of variable display regions Special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a special winning control pattern for specifying a specific display result,
When the pre-determining means determines that the generation of a specific award for which only one game medium is granted out of the award winnings is permitted, the specific award for the specific variable display area is determined. The number of steps different from the number of steps for specifying the display result constituting the specific award winning is specified for the number of steps where the display result to be configured is within the predetermined range. A specific award winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a specific award winning control pattern that identifies the specific display result for at least one of the number of steps;
When the decision to the effect that does not allow the occurrence of any of the winning by the predetermination means have been made, the display other than the specific display results from the number of any step of the step number for the particular variable display area A non-winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a non-winning control pattern for specifying a result;
The specific variable display area when the pre-determining means determines that the generation of a special award that accompanies a larger number of game media than the specific award among the award is made. A special grant that selects a special grant award control pattern that identifies a display result that constitutes the special award for a number of steps in which the display result that constitutes the special award win is within the predetermined range among the number of steps. Winning control pattern selection means,
Including
In the display band constituting the specific variable display area, the display result constituting the specific prize winning and the display result constituting the special prize winning are arranged at intervals exceeding the predetermined range,
The special grant award control pattern specifies a display result constituting the special grant award only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the specific grant award is located within the predetermined range,
The specific grant award control pattern specifies the display result constituting the specific grant award only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the special grant award is located within the predetermined range, Specifying the specific display result with respect to at least one number of steps out of the number of steps in which the display result constituting the special award winning is located within the predetermined range;
The special prize control pattern is the number of steps in which the display result constituting the special prize winning is located within the predetermined range, and the specific prize winning control pattern is the number of steps in which the specific display result is specified. Identifying the specific display result for at least one step number;
When the pre-determining means determines to allow the occurrence of the specific award winning while being controlled by the special game, the predetermined award that is given more number of game media than the specific award winning is provided. A slot machine that also decides to allow the occurrence of The specific award winning control pattern is larger than the number of steps for specifying the display result constituting the specific award winning when the advance determining unit determines that the occurrence of the specific award winning is permitted. The slot machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the specific display result is specified for the number of steps. The special prize control pattern is:
The control pattern selected by the special winning control pattern selecting means when the pre-deciding means determines that the first special winning among the special winnings is allowed to be generated , the control pattern of the number of steps A first special prize control pattern for specifying a display result constituting the first special prize for at least one of the number of steps;
The control pattern selected by the special winning control pattern selecting means when the pre-determining means determines that the second special winning among the special winnings is allowed to be generated, The display result constituting the second special prize is specified with respect to at least one step number of the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the special prize control pattern specifies the display result constituting the first special prize. A second special prize control pattern to
Including
The specific winning control pattern is specified with respect to at least one step number of steps different from the number of steps in which the first special winning control pattern specifies a display result constituting the first special winning pattern. The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein a display result constituting a winning is specified. It said predetermination means, the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that the determination of whether to permit the generation of said predetermined imparting winning only in the special game.

Images